Home

User` User User`` - Electronic Business Machines

1. Note Trouble With Multipage Documents If you have trouble feeding a multipage document do the following 1 Remove the stack and tap it on a flat surface to even the edges L N x 5 a Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 9 a v ils Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a 2 Gently insert the stack into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF until it stops If you have further trouble with page jams while feeding see Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 13 5 Note 1 You cannot feed a multipage document of thick media such as postcards or business cards Use manual feed instead to feed one page at a time 1 Wait until all pages of your document have been scanned completely before starting a new job N 6 10 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 aa AY Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af A 1 1100 book Page 11 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o Loading Documents for Manual Feed 1 Make sure the document feed lever is set to manual document feed A l Cano 2 Adjust the document guides to the width of the document N o xs re Da i lt j ne c O 72 Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 11 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 12 Friday December 13 2002 5 0
2. E Changing the Paper Size Setting The Paper Cassette 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Data Registration R E G S T CO 1 DAT RATION DATA REGSTRATION 3 Press Set and use A or V to select 5 PRINTER SETTINGS Sac pi REGSTRATION 5 PRINTER SETTINGS 4 Press Set and use A or V to select 2 PAPER SIZE Set A y PRINTER SETTINGS 2 PAPER SIZE S 5 Press Set twice g oc PAPER SIZE 5 1 CASSETTE a a CASSETTE A4 6 Use A or V to select paper size aon CASSETTE A4 CASSETTE LTR 7 Press Set Set lt gt PAPER SIZE 2 MP TRAY Chapter 4 Paper Handling 4 19 a MWB als HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 20 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E 8 Press Stop to return to standby mode a 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD The Multi Purpose Tray 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Re istration a N STRATION 3 Press Set and use A or V to select 5 PRINTER SETTINGS Set A y lt gt DATA REGSTRATION 5 PRINTER SETTINGS 4 Press Set and use A or V to select 2 PAPER SIZE Set A y lt gt PRINTER SETTINGS i 2 PAPER SIZE 5 Press Set and use A or V to select 2 MP TRAY Set A y E PAPER SIZE aS 2 MP TRAY 6 Pre
3. E a Nb mal A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Loading Documents for Automatic Feed 1 Make sure the document feed lever is set to automatic document feed a 2S A lt 6 Canol Ai Be sure to pull the feed lever towards you before sliding it to the left Note 2 If the document has multiple pages tap it on a flat surface to even the edges Chapter 6 o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af Sending Faxes 6 7 L B N o xs rs Da i lt j ne c O 72 a v ils mal Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a 3 Adjust the document guides to the width of the document 4 Gently insert the document face down top of the document first into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF until it stops 6 8 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af aa AY Zs f A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A E The document is now ready for scanning The machine automatically feeds the pages one by one from the bottom of the stack Wait until all pages of your document have been scanned completely before starting a new job IN
4. f o A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 3 Usea soft dry clean cloth to clean the scanning glass and rollers shaded areas m SCANNING GLASS LI If the document scanning glass and rollers are dirty the documents you send copy or print will also be dirty Clean with a soft cloth that will not scratch the glass or rollers 4 Clean the shaded areas of the operation panel and the machine QO Dirt and dust particles that collect on the underside of the operation panel also affect the quality of documents you send copy or print Chapter 14 Maintaining Your Machine 14 7 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mi d 5 o gt ov DE 8 6 e f a MIP mal A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 5 Use a soft dry clean cloth to wipe up paper dust around the rollers 6 When you are finished close the operation panel by pressing it down from the center as shown Be sure to close the operation panel until it locks into place Otherwise the LA machine will not function properly Note 7 Reconnect the power cord 14 8 Maintaining Your Machine Chapter 14 o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Transporting the M
5. Type Size Weight Capacity CUSTOM1 17 24 Ib 100 sheets LONG 64 90 g m Max 0 4 in 10 mm 8 5 x 12 5 in stack height to 8 5 x 13 4 in 216 x 317 mm to 216 x 340 mm CUSTOM2 17 24 Ib 100 sheets SHORT 64 90 g m Max 0 4 in 10 mm 8 5 x 10 0 in stack height to 8 5 x 10 6 in 216 x 254 mm to 216 x 270 mm Envelopes U S Commercial 7 envelopes No 10 9 5 x 4 1 in European DL 7 envelopes 220 x 110 mm Labels Letter A4 Max 0 4 in 10 mm stack height Transparencies Letter A4 1 sheet 20 lb 75g m 1 sheet available for 17 28 Ib 64 105 g m May occur to reduce stack of sheets or to enlarge the margins on a page Lo 3 c G I o Q a For media other than letter legal and A4 size plain paper use face up delivery See page 4 10 for details N Note Chapter 4 Paper Handling 4 3 m V US HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af AS NB A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Plain Paper Follow these guidelines when selecting paper 1 The laser printing process uses high temperatures to fuse toner to the paper Use paper that will not melt vaporize discolor or emit dangerous fumes at temperatures near 338 F 170 C For example do not use vellum paper in a laser printer Make sure any letterhead or colored paper you use can withstand high temperatures 1 Make sure the
6. 1 If you want to clear a mistaken entry Press Clear and re enter the number You can also use to lt delete the rightmost digit and enter the correct number 10 Press Set Set lt gt NORMAL R 2 UNI 7 18 Receiving Faxes Chapter 7 o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 19 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 11 Press Set again then use the numeric buttons to enter the name you want to store UNIT NAME tA o x in dD 2 D D as 1 For details on entering letters see page 3 2 I You can store up to 24 characters for the name 12 Press Set Set C NORMAL RX 13 Press Set Set lt D 14 Use A or V to select TEL FAX or FAX TEL AUTO SW A Vv RX MODE co Co TEL RX MODE FAX RX MODE FAX TEL AUTO SW 15 When the setting you want to set is displayed press Set For this example we chose FAX TEL AUTO SW If you select TEL or FAX and would like to make additional assignments go to step 7 To finish registration and return to standby mode press Stop Set DRPD 2 DOUBLE RING 16 Use A or V to select 6 FAX TEL AUTO SW A V Cc e DRPD 6 FAX TEL AUTO SW 17 Press Set Set lt o FAX 1 Chapter 7 Receiving Faxes 7 19 m v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 20 Friday December 13
7. HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 23 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Group Dialing If you frequently send faxes to the same group of numbers you can create a group Groups are stored under One Touch Speed Dialing buttons or Coded Speed Dialing codes and can contain as many as 123 numbers Creating Groups for Group Dialing The numbers you register in a group must already be stored under One Touch Speed Dialing buttons or Coded Speed Dialing codes Each group is stored under a One Touch Speed Dialing button or a Coded Speed Dialing code Create groups for group dialing as follows 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration 5 Pre ATRAEN RATION 3 Use A or V to select 2 TEL REGISTRATION A V a0 ea aa 4 Press Set 2 5 Ee E 3 5 Use A or V to select 3 GROUP DIAL a A V dd ee 6 Press Set os GROUP DIAL Chapter 5 Speed Dialing 5 23 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 24 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E To store a group under a One Touch Speed Dialing button 7 Use A V or the One Touch Speed Dialing button to select an unused One Touch Speed Dialing button 01 to 24 Oh OS or te ao GROUP DIAL 1 Ifa group or number is already registered under the button you select GROUP DIAL or 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL is d
8. Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Guidelines for Selecting Print Media You can produce high quality laser prints on most plain paper including cotton bond paper and photocopying paper Your machine does not require special laser paper You can load the following media in the paper cassette or the multi purpose tray Paper Cassette Type Size Weight Capacity Plain paper Letter 17 24 Ib 250 sheets 8 5 x 11 in 64 90 g m Max 1 1 in 27 5mm 216 x 279 4 mm stack height A4 17 24 Ib 250 sheets 8 3 x 11 7 in 64 90 g m Max 1 1 in 27 5 mm 210 x 297 mm stack height Multi Purpose Tray Type Size Weight Capacity Plain paper 3 7 x5 in to 17 24 lb 100 sheets 8 5 x 14 in 64 90 g m Max 0 4 in 10 mm 94 x 127 mm to 216 stack height x 356 mm Letter 17 24 lb 100 sheets 8 5 x 11 in 64 90 g m Max 0 4 in 10 mm 216 x 279 4 mm stack height Legal 17 24 lb 100 sheets 8 5 x 14 in 64 90 g m Max 0 4 in 10 mm 216 x 355 6 mm stack height A4 17 24 lb 100 sheets 8 3 x 11 7 in 64 90 g m Max 0 4 in 10 mm 210 x 297 mm stack height 20 Ib 75g m 1 sheet available for 17 28 lb 64 105 g m 4 2 Paper Handling Chapter 4 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L Ei a VA US Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a
9. The contents of this guide are printed on 70 recycled paper Canon CANON INC 30 2 Shimomaruko 3 chome Ohta ku Tokyo 146 8501 Japan CANON U S A INC One Canon Plaza Lake Success NY 11042 U S A CANON CANADA INC 6390 Dixie Road Mississauga Ontario L5T 1P7 Canada CANON EUROPA N V Bovenkerkerweg 59 61 P O Box 2262 1180 EG Amstelveen The Netherlands CANON FRANCE S A 17 quai du President Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex France CANON U K LTD Woodhatch Reigate Surrey RH2 8BF United Kingdom CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH Europark Fichtenhain A10 47807 Krefeld Germany CANON LATIN AMERICA INC 703 Waterford Way Suite 400 Miami Florida 33126 U S A CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 1 Thomas Holt Drive North Ryde Sydney N S W 2113 Australia CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD 79 Anson Road 09 01 06 Singapore 079906 CANON HONGKONG CO LTD 9 F The Hong Kong Club Building 3A Chater Road Central Hong Kong HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 122002NF CANON INC 2002 PRINTED IN CHINA e Peur_299 L dOSOZ SSVID YJSV7 UOL epiny s jesn E ONI PANTONE Canon LASER CLASS 2050P User s Guide fs Please read this guide before operating this equipment After you finish reading this guide store it in a safe place for future reference ENG Nip ANS o A 1 1100 book Page ii Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Copyright Copyright 2002 by Canon Inc All
10. 2 o oc Chapter 12 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s Guide Reports and Lists 12 3 A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Transmission TX Reports The machine normally prints a report only when an error occurs during sending TX Error Report However you can set the machine to print a report every time you send a document TX Report If you send a document using memory you can also select whether the first page of the document is printed with the report See pages 15 5 and 15 6 for details on setting these options Error TX Report 12 31 2002 10 32 FAX 8334423 WORLD ESTATE INC dq 001 ERROR TX RE i feof of fe fe fe soe ata a oe a be ee oe a aah oho ah TX FUNCTION WAS NOT COMPLETED TX RX NO 0006 CONNECTION TEL 1 213 978 3314 SUBADDRESS CONNECTION ID JOHN BARRISTER ST TIME 12 31 10 30 USAGE T 00 00 PGS SENT 0 RESULT NG STOP 11 See the following pages for an explanation of the report 12 4 Reports and Lists Chapter 12 o HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nb 12 31 2002 09 58 FAX 8334423 WORLD ESTATE INC 001 Sead dk dak bak TRANSMISSION OK TX RX NO 0006 CONNECTION TEL 20 545 8545 SUBADDRESS CONNECTION ID JOHN BARRISTER ST TIME 12 31 09 48 USAGE T 00 16 PGS SENT 1 RESULT OK WHEN YOU SET THE FAX TO PRINT THE SLEREXE COMPANY LIMITED THE FIRST SAPORS LANE BO
11. 1 1100 book Page 13 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 12 31 2002 13 36 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC A 001 CODED SPEED DIAL LIST 2 t 01 CONNECTION TEL 1 914 438 3619 CONNECTION ID SEYMOUR GREEN NOT SORTED TX TYPE REGULAR TX 06 CONNECTION TEL 761 1298 CONNECTION ID JOHN BARRISTER TX TYPE REGULAR TX 08 CONNECTION TEL 732 2233 CONNECTION ID ADAM BOOKS CPA TX TYPE REGULAR TX 12 31 2002 13 36 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC ld 001 RR RR Ske HE CODED SPEED DIAL LIST 2 08 CONNECTION TEL 732 2233 CONNECTION ID ADAM BOOKS CPA SORTED TX TYPE REGULAR TX 06 CONNECTION TEL 761 1298 CONNECTION ID JOHN BARRISTER TX TYPE REGULAR TX t 01 CONNECTION TEL 1 914 4383619 CONNECTION ID SEYMOUR GREEN TX TYPE REGULAR TX Group Dial List 12 31 2002 13 36 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC d001 GROUP DIAL LIST 05 CANON GROUP 01 876 2398 CANON TX 02 613 9076 CANON OH x 01 225 7823 CANON NY 10 233 7766 CANON CA Chapter 12 Reports and Lists 12 13 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s Guide n 2 a v c G n 2 d 2 o a A 1 1100 book Page 14 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f User s Data List You can print a list of the data registered in your machine This list is useful when you want to review the user data information you may have entered such as your name and number the date
12. ccccceeeceessssssssesesesesssssesesesesssseesesesssesseeeees 12 4 Error TX Report sisira insesi sbeeten cucu ninie osiin tetepa Sebati 12 4 TX Report eni hoiei deee Seabees oa pare Lap sede ba Satan see h nantes teabsenalan 12 5 Multi TX RX R pot beiesi nii i ai d a eiS 12 6 Reception RX R pOrt sesoses ees aiioe r Esnes EEE Eea aen ea 12 7 Contents xvii HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users ae a SZ TUS Ei MIP Zs ZIN TTT00 book Page xviii Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM a Memory Clear Reporta a psa E nsee aae keker RE eies REE ia EE a 12 8 Speed Dialing lists snaren erene o a E E a E E a 12 9 One Touch Speed Dial List ccccscesceseseecssesescecesesesssneneesesesneeneeees 12 11 Coded Speed Dial List iieii onana EAVES 12 12 Group Dial Tiston ie tuts atic eaniiealiaeien iin ndan sani 12 13 User s Data List i teinsccccscicisuss crisecieas cote e tev vetes Sule athe evel eevee 12 14 Doe Memory List AES sasae 12 16 Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions ccc eee ceeseeeeeeeetesesseesenesesenees 13 1 If You Cannot Solve the Problem cccceee cc eseseeseeesesseseesesesseeseeeneees 13 2 Problems d mis a e a aa ant iiwis tants aileat tales 13 3 Paper JAMS ii esena e ee A o o e A 13 5 Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF neess 13 5 Jams in the Output Slots ieni ea eaa E a aE 13 7 Jams in the Paper Cassette ccccccccscsescsteteeeceeeses
13. 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration PEOR HERT on 3 Press Set twice 55 PATOS PRSERATARI USER SETTINGS 1 DATE amp TIME 4 Use A or V to select 5 SCAN CONTRAST A oY Bi TSC SCAN CONTRAST 5 Press Set Set D SCAN CONTRAST DARD 1 The currently set scan contrast is displayed 6 14 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 eo HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 15 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E 6 Press A or y to select the scan contrast you wish to set A v SCAN CONTRAST S STANDARD m You can select STANDARD DARKER or LIGHTER 1 You can cancel and return to standby mode by pressing Stop any time before pressing Set in step 7 7 Press Set Set U S E 6 Cc 8 Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD Sending Methods Manual Sending Via the Handset Use manual sending via the handset if you want to speak with the other party before sending a fax to them With manual sending via the handset you dial converse normally and when they are ready to receive your fax press Start Copy to begin sending See page 6 18 for more details on manual sending via the handset For manual sending via the handset you need to have the handset or a telephone connected to your machine Memory Sending Memory sending allows you to send a do
14. 9 To change the name use lt gt and the numeric buttons to enter the new name over the previous name NAME tA Canon CANADA You can also delete the name by pressing Clear For details on entering letters see page 3 2 You can enter up to 16 characters for the name Coc If you want to keep the same name do not enter a new name and go to step 10 10 Press Set Set D 11 To change additional numbers and or names press Data Registration and repeat steps 5 to 10 Or If you have finished changing numbers and or names press Stop to return to standby mode Stop 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD dD S m 3 2 7 Chapter 5 Speed Dialing 5 9 e v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Using One Touch Speed Dialing Once you have registered your numbers under One Touch Speed Dialing buttons you can use them to send documents as follows Ai Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document See page 6 6 for more details Note 1 Prepare the document and load it face down into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 1 Ifnecessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast See page 6 13 for more details 2 Press the One Touch Speed Dialing button assigned to the number to which you wish to send a fax i TEL
15. A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Guidelines for Entering Information The following section explains how to enter user information into the machine Ai If you pause while entering information and do not make an entry for LA more than 60 seconds the machine returns to standby mode and loses all Note information you had entered up to that point You will then have to start again Entering Numbers Letters and Symbols Each numeric button has a number and a group of uppercase and lowercase letters assigned to it Use the chart below to determine which numeric button to press for each character Button Letter Mode A Number Mode 1 1 1 ABCabc 2 DEFdef 3 GHIghi 4 JKLjkl 5 MNOmno 6 7 8 9 0 PQRSpqrs TUVtuv WXYZwxyz HFLOTOSOMINIDI ALF wWl ny RHI A 1 2G R amp t lt gt Press to switch between number and letter mode 3 2 Registering Information in the Machine Chapter 3 a MIP HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A f o A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM IN Note When you are in letter mode A appears in the upper right corner UNIT NAME A When you are in number mode 1 appears in the upper right corner UNIT NAME 1 1 Entering a single letter For example enter a lowercase let
16. AS A 1 1100 book Page 24 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM NB Removing the Document From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 1 Open the operation panel by gently pulling it toward you 1 Do not pull the document without opening the operation panel otherwise the document will tear 6 24 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 e SZ TUS HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL ie j AZ ANS A 1 1100 book Page 25 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A F i o 3 When you are finished close the operation panel by pressing it down from the center as shown Ai Be sure to close the operation panel until it locks into place Otherwise the LA machine will not function properly Note no oO x re Da c pe c O 72 Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 25 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 26 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A s i o Redialing Manual Redialing To redial the last number dialed with the numeric buttons press Redial To cancel manual redialing simply press Stop Automatic Redialing With Memory Sending With memory sending you can set machine to automatically dial the fax number again if the receiving machine does not answer or if the line is busy You can also control how many times machine will redial the number and how long it will wait be
17. HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L a 5 e gt ov DE 8 f a AY lls Ei KA Zs A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a 14 10 Maintaining Your Machine Chapter 14 HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af a AY Zs Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A F T Chapter 15 The Menu System This chapter summarizes the menu system Use the information here as a guide to help you customize operations your machine performs LY Understanding the Menu System ccccccscsesesseieesceeesessseenenenens 15 2 LY Accessing the USER SETTINGS Menu ccccccsesecescesseseseenenenens 15 3 D Accessing the REPORT SETTINGS Menu ccccccscssessssesesseeseseeeeees 15 5 LY Accessing the TX SETTINGS Menu c cccccccceseseesetesceeeseseseenenenene 15 7 LY Accessing the RX SETTINGS Menu c ccccccssesssetetescecesesesesnenenene 15 9 O Accessing the PRINTER SETTINGS Menu cccccsssssssssesseseeseeeeees 15 11 gt D Accessing the POLLING BOX Menu cecssescsssssssssessesssssseseeseseeeeees 15 13 2 LY Accessing the SYSTEM SETTINGS Menu ccccccccccesseeseetenenene 15 15 E o Chapter 15 The Menu System 15 1 m V US HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5
18. Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page ix Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM USERS IN CANADA PRE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CANON FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT A Location Supply a suitable table cabinet or desk See the Appendix for the machine s dimensions and weight Order Information 1 Provide only a single line to touch tone or rotary telephone set terminated with a standard 4 pin modular phone plug Touch tone is recommended if available in your area Order an CA11A modular jack USOC code which should be installed by the telephone company If the CA11A jack is not present installation cannot occur Order a normal business line from your telephone company s business representative The line should be a regular voice grade line or equivalent Use one line per machine DDD DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL LINE Or IDDD INTERNATIONAL DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL LINE IF YOU COMMUNICATE OVERSEAS N Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards e g the 2500 touch tone or 500 rotary pulse dial telephones A dedicated Note extension off a PBX unit without Camp On signals is also permissible with your LASER CLASS 2050P Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send non standard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes which may cause a fax error C Power Requirements The power outlet should be a three prong grounded receptacle Sing
19. S WARRANTY APPLIES TO CARTRIDGES SOLD AND USED IN THE U S A AND CANADA ONLY HRA AZSVDVVUDOAVHOD a gt a4 I As specified in the Product s operator s manual In Canada CAUTION Keep out of reach of children Keep from contact with oxidizing materials Refer to instructions for handling and storing CANON U S A INC CANON CANADA INC One Canon Plaza 6390 DIXIE ROAD Lake Success New York 11042 1198 MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO L5T 1P7 Canada HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af LS V ZS a wa fm Page 13 Friday December 13 2002 2 38PM GARANTIE RESTREINTE DES CARTOUCHES FX3 DE CANON Canon U S A Inc et Canon Canada Inc collectivement Canon certifient a l acheteur initial Acheteur que la cartouche FX3 de Canon livr e avec la pr sente garantie restreinte la Cartouche utilis e avec un produit compatible de marque Canon le Produit est sans vices de mati re et de fabrication dans des conditions d utilisation et de service normales pendant une p riode de trente 30 jours compter de la date de l achat initial Une Cartouche d fectueuse qui est retourn e au d taillant ou au revendeur autoris Canon chez qui vous avez achet la Cartouche collectivement le D taillant pendant la p riode de garantie de trente 30 jours et dont l inspection confirme une d fectuosit sera chang e contre une Cartouche neuve La p riode
20. 2 Press Data Registration Data eae REGISTRATION a 1 DATA REGSTRATION 3 Press Set twice Set Set com gt ca DATA REGSTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS USER SETTINGS 1 DATE amp TIME 4 Use A or V to select 2 UNIT TELEPHONE A V USER SETTINGS ee 2 UNIT TELEPHONE 5 Press Set then enter your fax telephone number using the numeric buttons UNIT TELEPHONE TEL 1234567 I You can enter up to 20 digits for your fax telephone number 1 You can enter spaces by pressing Space to make the number easier to read 4 To enter a plus sign before the fax telephone number press 1 If you make a mistake press Clear to delete the entire entry or press lt to delete the rightmost digit and enter the correct number 3 10 Registering Information in the Machine Chapter 3 e HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A 9 o A 1 1100 book Page 11 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Press Set to save the fax telephone number lt D Set Press Set again then use the numeric buttons to type in your name or business name 1 For more details on entering letters See page 3 2 m You can enter up to 24 characters for your name or company name LY You can delete the entire entry by pressing Clear Press Set to save the name Set lt gt USER SETTINGS 4 TX TERMINAL ID Press Stop to return to standby
21. AZ lls HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 32 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Copying Problems Problem The machine will not make a copy MEMORY FULL appears in the LCD display when you are making multiple copies Possible Cause The document may not be placed correctly in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF The handset may be off its hook The machine may not be operating properly The machine s memory is full Solution Make sure the document you are copying is set in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF properly and the LCD display shows DOCUMENT READY Make sure the handset is on its cradle Print a report or list to make sure the machine is operating properly See the printer driver manual Print out any received faxes stored in memory then try copying again Otherwise copy one page after another See page 8 2 13 32 Frequently Asked Questions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Chapter 13 a m SZ Zs Ei A 1 1100 book Page 33 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Nip AS Printing Problems If you are having problems printing with the machine check the problems and solutions listed in the following table When printing problems occur while printing from your PC refer to the Printer Driver Software User s Guide Problem Possible cause The Alarm lamp comes T
22. Economy toner saving printing The machine includes an economy printing mode which allows you to reduce toner consumption by 30 to 40 approximately Based on ITU T No 1 Chart standard mode 1 4 Introducing the Machine Chapter 1 o a AY Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Copier Features Up to 99 copies The machine can make up to 99 copies of a document at a time at a rate of up to 6 copies per minute o r a Introducing the Resolution The machine scans documents at 400 x 300 dpi when using direct copying and 200 x 300 dpi when using memory copying Printing resolution is 600 x 600 dpi Copy reduction The machine can reduce copies to 90 80 or 70 of their original size This allows you to copy legal size documents onto A4 size paper for example Telephone Features Automatic Dialing The machine s three automatic dialing methods One Touch Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing and Group Dialing can be used to store telephone numbers and fax numbers for easy and efficient calling Connection for the handset an answering machine or a telephone Connecting the handset or an extension telephone to the machine allows you to use it to make and receive normal telephone calls In addition connecting an answering machine allows you to receive documents and telephone messag
23. Enter the number using the numeric buttons or press Redial fN _ Redial Oo amp e You can only enter one number with the numeric buttons Ai 1 After entering the first One Touch Speed Dialing button or Coded LA Speed Dialing code you have five seconds to enter another speed Note dialing button or code before machine begins sending automatically If you have entered more than one speed dialing button or code machine waits for 10 seconds before it begins sending If you do not want machine to send automatically you need to change the TIME OUT setting See pages 15 7 and 15 8 for more details 1 If you want to review the numbers you entered open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel and use A or V to scroll through the numbers 6 32 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 a MIP HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 33 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E 3 When you finish entering numbers press Start Copy to begin sending or wait a few seconds for machine to begin sending automatically Start Copy 1 The machine then scans the document into memory and begins sending it to the destinations in numerical order starting with the one touch speed dialing numbers then the coded speed dialing numbers and finally the number dialed with the numeric buttons or Redial Ai If machine memory becomes full while scanning your document LA MEMORY FULL appears in the LCD display If this hap
24. Set lt D A v CO REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGSTRATION DATA REGSTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS S S n gt S DATA REGSTRATION z 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS E 5 Press Set then use A or V to display the item you want to set or change Chapter 15 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af The Menu System 15 15 mal an v ils A 1 1100 book Page 16 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM SYSTEM SETTINGS For details on accessing the settings below see page 15 15 Setting Description Sub Settings 1 RX RESTRICTION Restricts reception of faxes to the numbers registered for OFF speed dialing on your machine See page 10 6 ON If you select ON you can select additional sub settings REGISTERED SENDR WITH SENDER INFO 2 DATE SETUP Selects the date format displayed in the LCD and printed on MM DD YYYY the faxes you send DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD 3 DISPLAY Select a language for prompts messages menus and printed ENGLISH LANGUAGE reports FRENCH SPANISH PORTUGUESE 4 TX START SPEED Set the transmission speed for all documents you send 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 7200 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps 5 RX START SPEED Set the transmission speed for all documents you receive 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 7200 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps 6 DAYLGHT SAV Set the daylight saving time See page 3 13 OFF TIME ON If you select ON you can select additional sub settings
25. appears in the LCD display PLEASE WAIT d When the date the time the receive mode and the resolution mode appear the machine is in standby mode and ready for use 2 20 Setting Up Your Machine HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD Chapter 2 E mal AZ ANS A 1 1100 book Page 21 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A o a If the toner cartridge has not been installed yet the message CHECK COVER CART alternates with the standby mode display In this case Note install the toner cartridge See Installing Replacing the Toner Cartridge on page 2 33 N CHECK COVER CART 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTe STANDARD 5 e gt o of 25 2s h Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 21 v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 22 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A s i Connecting the Machine to Your PC Your machine has a USB port that allows you to connect it to a PC To do this you need to purchase a USB cable Ai For best results use a cable that is 16 4 feet 5 meters in length or shorter Note Connect the machine to your computer as follows 1 Make sure the machine s power cord is connected and the computer is turned on 2 Connect the USB cable to your machine and PC
26. 14 2 Maintaining Your Machine Chapter 14 m SZ Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Cleaning the Inside of the Machine To prevent toner powder and paper dust from accumulating and affecting the quality of the machine s printing clean the inside of the machine periodically as follows N happening When you disconnect the power cord any documents stored in memory will be erased if you leave the machine disconnected for one hour or Note more Be sure to connect the power cord after cleaning to avoid this 1 Disconnect the power cord from the machine 2 Open the front cover by lifting the release latch on the right side of the machine 11 Lift the cover forward to its open position Chapter 14 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Maintaining Your Machine L a 5 e gt ov DE 8 f aa AY lls Ei A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f 3 Hold the cartridge by its handle and remove it as shown HANDLE 1 Store the cartridge in its protective bag to avoid exposure to light 4 Usea clean soft dry lint free cloth to remove any toner or paper debris from the shaded area DO NOT TOUCH THE TRANSFER CHARGING ROLLER BLACK Do no
27. A UY ees LAST WEEK 11 You can select from the following FIRST WEEK SECOND WEEK THIRD WEEK FOURTH WEEK LAST WEEK fifth week 11 Press Set twice 5S SS DAY SUNDAY 12 Use A or V to select the day of the week when Daylight Saving Time starts A Vv Ooo ie SATURDAY 13 Press Set twice Set Set CoC TIME 02 00 3 14 Registering Information in the Machine Chapter 3 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mal E t f o A 1 1100 book Page 15 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 14 15 16 Use the numeric buttons to enter the time when Daylight Saving Time starts TIME Press Set and set the month day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends in the same manner as setting the start date and time Set DAYLGHT SAV TIME 2 END DATE TIME Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop Chapter 3 Registering Information in the Machine 3 15 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af o S ao Efe ec amp Lor 2g SES gE o 2 mal E an MWB als Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 16 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 3 16 Registering Information in the Machine Chapter 3 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L a m SZ Zs Ei w ai A 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002
28. A 1 1100 book Page 40 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Do not use damp curled wrinkled or torn paper as these can cause paper jams or poor print quality Note LY Highly textured or extremely smooth or shiny paper does not print well N I The laser printing process uses high temperatures to fuse toner to the paper Use paper that will not melt vaporize discolor or emit dangerous fumes at temperatures near 338 F 170 C For example do not use vellum paper in a laser printer Make sure any letterhead or colored paper you use can withstand high temperatures 1 Make sure the paper is free of dust lint and oil stains 1 To keep the paper from curling do not open paper packs until you are ready to use the paper Store unused paper from opened packs in a cool dry location in the original packaging 1 Your machine is factory set to use letter size paper in the paper cassette or the multi purpose tray If you wish to use different sized paper you must change the setting from the PRINTER SETTINGS menu See page 15 11 for more details 11 Refer to Chapter 4 for more details on the types of media you can load in the paper cassette or the multi purpose tray Do not load paper in the multi purpose tray when the machine is printing Caution 2 40 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 aa AY Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af A 1 1100 book Page 41 Fri
29. Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 33 aa AY lls HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af A 1 1100 book Page 34 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Do not open the front cover without lifting the release latch as this may cause damage to your machine Caution 4 Ifyou are replacing a used cartridge hold the cartridge by its handle and remove it as shown HANDLE 1 Dispose of the toner cartridge properly To recycle your used cartridge simply follow the instructions included with your new FX3 cartridge 2 34 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A ar A 1 1100 book Page 35 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A mi 5 Remove the new FX3 cartridge from its protective bag 1 Save the protective bag the cartridge comes in You may need to repack the cartridge later 6 Gently rock the cartridge from side to side several times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge 1 Poor print quality may result if the toner becomes unequally distributed inside the cartridge Machine d J o gt a a c Q 7 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 35 an MWB als HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 36 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f B Place the cartridge on a flat clean surf
30. transmission TX 12 4 Report button explanation 2 29 using 12 2 12 9 12 14 REPORT SETTINGS menu accessing 15 5 description 3 6 settings 15 6 Resolution copying 11 2 FAX FINE 6 13 FAX PHOTO 6 13 I 8 Index HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae ml o SZ Zs Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM FAXSTANDARD 6 13 scanning 6 13 setting 6 13 11 2 SUPER FINE 6 13 Resolution button 2 26 explanation 2 27 using 6 13 11 2 RING COUNT setting 15 10 RING START TIME setting 7 5 7 7 Roller transfer charging 2 24 RX CALL LEVEL setting 15 4 RX MODE setting 15 10 RX PAGE FOOTER settings 15 10 RX REDUCTION setting 15 12 RX report 12 7 RX REPORT setting 15 6 RX SETTINGS menu accessing 15 9 description 3 6 settings 15 10 RX START SPEED setting 15 16 S Safety instructions 1 11 SCAN CONTRAST setting 15 4 Scanning area 6 5 cleaning components contrast 6 13 6 14 resolution 6 13 SCANNING P nnnn message 13 45 Search buttons explanation 2 30 14 6 Selecting automatic document feed 6 6 manual document feed 6 6 paper delivery 4 8 print media 4 2 Selector paper delivery 2 23 4 9 4 10 Sending canceling 6 23 delayed 6 36 destinations 6 31 documents 6 18 manual via the handset 6 15 6 18 memory 6 15 6 20 methods 6 15 polling 9 6 preparing tosend 6 3 problems 13 24 with group dialing 5 27 6 33 Sequential broadcasting 6 31 Serial num
31. 2002 5 07 PM 9 18 Press Set again then use A V or the numeric buttons to enter a time between 0 and 30 seconds RING START TIME 8SEC 1 This setting determines how many seconds the machine waits before ringing when it receives a call d The factory default setting is 8 seconds 19 Press Set Set D FAX 2 20 Press Set again then use A V or the numeric buttons to enter a time between 10 and 45 seconds F T RING TIME 5SEC 1 This setting determines how many seconds the machine rings while waiting for someone to pick up the handset d The factory default setting is 15 seconds 21 Press Set Set lt gt FAX 3 22 Press Set again then use A or V to select RECEIVE or DISCONNECT Set A y D oo oo DEFAULT ACTION RECEIVE DEFAULT ACTION DISCONNECT 1 This setting tells the machine what to do if no one picks up the handset within the specified ring time set in step 20 7 20 Receiving Faxes Chapter 7 o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 21 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 d Select RECEIVE to receive the call and DISCONNECT to disconnect the call 2 x lt 23 Press Set Set c c gt RX SETTINGS E 3 INCOMING RING f o a 24 Press Stop to return to standby mode a 12 31 2002 FRI 10 00 DRPD STANDARD When DRPD is selected the commu
32. CONNECTOR USB PORT HANDSET E a amp Setting Up Your TELEPHONE LINE JACK EXTENSION TELEPHONE JACK HANDSET JACK Chapter 2 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af Setting Up Your Machine 2 25 an MIP mal A 1 1100 book Page 26 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM The Operation Panel 4 lt E LCD display Document feed lever In Use Memory lamp Pause button Alarm lamp Coded Dial button One Touch 2 So Speed Dialing buttons i r gag l Lisac SUPER Canon ee Bat m n Pause LASER CL SS 2050P lt In Use Memory aC Jel lt a JKL mno Coded Dial Alarm sC lt D C er Redial Receive Mode Resolution Set oC JC g gt G g gt q gt OO 101901910 sO uO OPER seos Hook Start Copy Stop CO 2 A ae eas aes a020 ae ha E SE One Touch Speed Dialing panel Numeric buttons Redial button L Set button Hook button Stop button Receive Mode button __ Resolution button Tone button Start Copy button Coded Dial button Press this button to dial a fax telephone number that you have registered for coded speed dialing Pause button
33. Inc and Canon Canada Inc collectively Canon warrant to the original purchaser the Purchaser of the Canon FX3 Cartridge packaged with this limited warranty the Cartridge when used in a compatible Canon brand product the Product to be free from defects in workmanship and materials under normal use and service for a period of thirty 30 days from the date of original purchase A defective Cartridge returned to the Canon authorized dealer or the reseller from whom you purchased the Cartridge collectively the Dealer within the thirty 30 day warranty period and proven to be defective upon inspection will be exchanged for a new Cartridge Warranty exchange shall not extend the original warranty period of the Cartridge When returning any Cartridge under this limited warranty you must pack the Cartridge in its original carton with a copy of the bill of sale or invoice of purchase together with a complete explanation of the problem and return it to he Dealer Shipping charges if any must be prepaid Cartridges covered by this limited warranty will be returned o you without charge by the Dealer O IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLIES TO THE CARTRIDGE AFTER THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF THE EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY STATED ABOVE AND NO OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTY CONDITION OR GUARANTY EXCEPT AS MENTIONED ABOVE GIVEN BY ANY PERSON OR
34. NB A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Cleaning the Machine Clean your machine regularly to keep it in good operating condition Ai Follow these precautions whenever you clean the machine 1 When the power cord is disconnected any documents stored in memory will be erased if you leave the machine disconnected for one hour or more Be sure to connect the power cord after cleaning to avoid this happening If REC D IN MEMORY appears in the LCD display follow the steps on pages 8 2 through 8 5 to print out the document Note d If you disconnect the machine while it is waiting to send a document you will have to set the machine to send your document again once you finish cleaning it However when you have set a document for delayed transmission the machine holds the document in its memory for about an hour 1 Do not use tissue paper paper towels or similar materials for cleaning they can stick to the components or generate static charges Cleaning the Machine s Exterior Clean the machine s outer casing as follows 1 Disconnect the power cord from the machine 2 Wipe the machine s exterior with a clean soft lint free cloth moistened with water or diluted dishwashing detergent solution Never use thinner benzene alcohol or any other organic solvent to clean the machine as these can damage the machine s surface Caution 3 Reconnect the power cord
35. S m 3 2 7 Chapter 5 Speed Dialing 5 11 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 12 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 Coded Speed Dialing Storing Numbers for Coded Speed Dialing You can store up to 100 numbers for coded speed dialing Follow this procedure to store coded speed dialing numbers and names 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Data Registration A v 3 E 4 Press Set Set C2 5 Use A or V to select 2 CODED SPEED DIAL A V Coy C 6 Press Set Set Using Search buttons TEL REGISTRAT 1 1 TOUCH SP g OOU CODED SPEED DIAL 00 7 Use A or V to select a two digit code 00 99 in the display A v CODED SPEED DIAL 04 5 12 Speed Dialing HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af Chapter 5 mal B Nb A 1 1100 book Page 13 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o Using the Coded Dial buttons 7 Press Coded Dial then use the numeric buttons to enter the two digit code you want to store Coded Dial CODED SPEED DIAL 04 1 If anumber is already registered under the code you select that number is displayed 1 If the code you select is registered for group dialing GROUP DIAL appears 8 Press Set Set ae E 9 Press Set again th
36. Transmission reports 12 4 error TX report 12 4 multi TX RX report 12 6 TX report 12 5 Transmission speed 1 4 Transmit Terminal Identification 3 8 Transparencies using 4 10 Transporting machine 14 9 TTI See Transmit Terminal Identification TTI POSITION setting 15 4 I 10 Index HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users ae Ei o SZ Zs Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 11 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM TX report 12 4 12 5 TX REPORT setting 15 6 TX SETTINGS menu accessing 15 7 description 3 6 settings 15 8 TX START SPEED setting 15 16 TX RX CANCELLED message 13 45 TX RX NO nnnn message 13 45 Type conventions 1 9 U UHQ Ultra High Quality unable to solve 13 2 Unit maintenance user s guide 2 5 UNIT TELEPHONE setting 3 10 15 4 Unpacking 2 5 USER SETTINGS menu accessing 15 3 description 3 6 settings 15 4 User s data list printing 12 14 sample 12 14 User s guide 2 5 1 9 1 3 6 13 conventions using 1 8 V Ventilation 1 11 Voltage 2 3 2 19 Volume ALARM VOLUME setting 15 4 CALLING VOLUME setting 15 4 KEYPAD VOLUME setting 15 4 LINE MONITOR VOL setting 15 4 VOLUME CONTROL setting 15 4 W Weight document 6 3 paper 4 2 Index HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae I 11 V US Ei l 1100 book Page 12 Thursday December 12 2002 4 25 PM CANON FX3 CARTRIDGE LIMITED WARRANTY Canon U S A
37. at the top of the faxes it receives To prevent this information from crowding the faxed image on the page and possibly lengthening the fax the machine automatically reduces the size of the image on the page Glossary HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af G 1 aa AZ lls 9 a A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Automatic redialing When the receiving machine is busy or does not answer or when an error occurs while sending the machine waits a specified time and then automatically redials the number If the receiving machine is still busy or does not answer the machine waits the specified time and dials again If the machine still does not go through the machine prints an error TX report B bps Bits per second Refers to the speed with which a machine machine sends and receives data Broadcasting Transmitting documents to more than one location through the machine s memory C CNG Calling Tone This is a signal sent by fax machines to identify the call as an incoming document When the receiving machine detects this signal it automatically starts to receive the fax transmission The majority of machines in use today can send and detect CNG signals Coded Speed Dialing An automatic dialing method that allows you to dial a fax or telephone number by pressing Coded Dial and a two digit code using the numeric buttons Cursor The underline symbo
38. figur s enlev s ou modifi s CANON NI AUCUN DETAILLANT N ASSUME DE RESPONSABILITE A L EGARD DES BLESSURES CORPORELLES OU DES DOMMAGES MATERIELS SAUF S ILS SONT CAUSES UNIQUEMENT ET DIRECTEMENT PAR LA NEGLIGENCE DE CANON OU D UN D TAILLANT DE LA PERTE DE PRODUITS D EXPLOITATION OU DE PROFITS NI A L GARD DES ECONOMIES OU DES PROFITS ON REALISES A L EGARD DES FRAIS ENGAGES POUR DE L EQUIPEMENT DE REMPLACEMENT ET DES SERVICES D ENTRETIEN ET APRES VENTE LA PERTE OU L ALTERATION DE DONN ES NI A L GARD DES FRAIS D ENTREPOSAGE OU DE TOUT DOMMAGE PARTICULIER INDIRECT OU CONSECUTIF DECOULANT DE L USAGE DE L USAGE IMPROPRE OU DE L IMPOSSIBILIT D UTILISER LA CARTOUCHE QUELLE QUE SOIT L ARGU TATION JURIDIQUE SUR LAQUELLE S APPUIE LA DEMANDE ET MEME SI CANON OU TOUT DETAILLANT ONT ETE INFO DE LA POSSIBILITE DE TELS DOMMAGES AUCUN RECOUVREMENT QUELLE QU EN SOIT LA FORME CONTRE CANON OU TOUT DETAILLANT NE SERA SUPERIEUR AU MONTANT DU PRIX D ACHAT DE LA CARTOUCHE A L ORIGINE DES DOMMAGES PRESUMES SANS SE LIMITER A CE QUI PRECEDE L ACHETEUR ASSUME TOUS LES RISQUES ET TOUTE LA RESPONSABILITE A L EGARD DES PERTES DES DOMMAGES ATERIELS ET DES BLESSURES CORPORELLES SUBIS PAR L ACHETEUR SA PROPRI T OU D AUTRES PERSONNES OU LEUR PROPRIETE EN RAISON DE LA POSSESSION DE L USAGE DE L USAGE IMPROPRE OU DE L IMPOSSIBILITE D UTILISER TOUTE CARTOUCHE VENDUE PAR CANON A MOINS QUE LESDITS DOMMAGES MATERIELS PERTES ET BLESSURES CORPORELLES AIENT E
39. machine disconnect the power cord immediately and contact your local authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer The back of the machine includes slots and openings for ventilation To keep the machine from overheating which can cause it to operate abnormally and create a fire risk take care not to block or cover these openings Do not operate the machine on a bed sofa rug or other similar soft surface or near a radiator or other heat source Do not place the machine in a closet or cabinet or on shelves unless adequate ventilation is available See Choosing a Location for Your Machine on page 2 3 for guidelines on how much space the machine needs for ventilation Operate the machine only from the type of power source indicated on the machine s label If you are unsure of the type of power available from your wall outlets contact your local power company Make sure the total amperage used by all devices connected to the wall outlet does not exceed the ampere rating of the outlet s circuit breaker Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not place the machine where the cord will be walked on Make sure the cord is not knotted or kinked Do not insert objects of any kind into the slots or openings on the machine s cabinet as they could touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts and result in fire or electric shock Chapter 1 Introducing the Machine 1 11 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User
40. settings when you use your machine for the first time you will rarely need to change them thereafter REPORT SETTINGS Lets you set the machine to print a report every time you send or receive a fax and also contains options for printing summary reports TX SETTINGS Contains items that let you customize how your machine sends documents RX SETTINGS Allows you to customize how your machine receives documents PRINTER SETTINGS Lets you customize how your machine prints documents POLLING BOX Lets you set up a polling box SYSTEM SETTINGS Allows you to set the date format transmission and receive speed etc 1 TEL REGISTRATION Lets you register numbers for One Touch Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing and Group Dialing For more details on each menu of DATA REGSTRATION see Chapter 15 The Menu System Note For more details on TEL REGISTRATION see Chapter 5 Speed Dialing 3 6 Registering Information in the Machine Chapter 3 o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Ei o SZ TUS A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f o Use the Special Function buttons to display and select items from the menu system as follows 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Registre R E G Co 1 N STRATION 3 Use the A or V to change the menu display A y CoO 4 Press Set to select an ite
41. 07 PM A a Understanding the Menu System The machine menu system allows you to customize the way your machine operates The menu system consists of seven menus each containing settings that control different functions of your machine This chapter outlines the various menus and shows you how to use them LA The factory default settings in the following tables are shown in bold type Note 15 2 The Menu System Chapter 15 a AZ lls HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af AZ ANS A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E E Accessing the USER SETTINGS Menu 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Data Pein REGISTRATION CO 1 DATA REGSTRATION 3 Press Set Set lt gt DATA REGSTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS F S 4 Press Set then use the A or V to display the item you want to set or S change S 2 Chapter 15 The Menu System 15 3 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM USER SETTINGS For details on accessing the settings below see page 15 3 Setting Description Sub Settings 1 DATE amp TIME Sets the current date and time See page 3 9 2 UNIT Enters the fax telephone number you want to appear TELEPHONE at the top of each fax page you send See page 3 10 3 UNIT NAME Ent
42. 1 RE 3 Press Set then use the numeric buttons to enter the time at which you want to send the document D ME 10 00 1 Enter the time using the 24 hour clock system Precede single digits with a zero Example 7 30 a m 07 30 11 30 p m 23 30 6 34 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 a Nb HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 35 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B 4 Press Set Set lt D ELAYED TX ELECT LOCATIONS TEL 5 Enter the destination s using any of the following three methods 1 One Touch Speed Dialing Press the desired One Touch Speed Dialing button s aC a0 1 Coded Speed Dialing Press Coded Dial then enter the two digit code 00 99 using the numeric buttons oS e Be sure to press Coded Dial before each code 1 Regular Dialing Enter the number using the numeric buttons or press Redial we or Redial e You can only enter one number with the numeric buttons 6 When you finish entering numbers press Start Copy Start Copy 1 The machine begins scanning the document into memory Ai 1 If machine memory becomes full while scanning your document LA MEMORY FULL appears in the LCD display If this happens you Note cannot send the document at a delayed time See page 6 24 to remove your document from the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 1 You can only register one preset sending oper
43. 15 spero pa a Manual document feed Heer edate ae document requirements 6 3 LOAD PAPER message 7 18 loading documents 6 11 koadmg selecting 6 6 documents 6 7 6 11 multi purpose tray 2 39 4 12 Index I 5 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users ae MIB Zils Se ZS A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 6 36 PM MANUAL MODE description 7 2 using 7 10 Memory deleting documents from 8 8 documents in 7 13 8 2 printing list of documents in 8 2 sending 6 15 6 20 MEMORY FULL message 11 4 13 43 13 45 Memory Reference button explanation 2 29 MEMORY USED nn message 11 2 13 43 Menu system PRINTER SETTINGS 3 6 15 11 15 12 REPORT SETTINGS 3 6 15 5 15 6 RX SETTINGS 3 6 15 9 15 10 SYSTEM SETTINGS 3 6 15 15 15 16 TEL REGISTRATION 3 6 TX SETTINGS 3 6 15 7 15 8 understanding 15 2 USER SETTINGS 3 6 15 3 15 4 using 3 6 Messages 7 13 13 38 MID PAUSE SET setting 15 8 Multi TX RX report 12 6 Multipage documents trouble with 6 9 Multi purpose tray 2 23 capacity 2 39 loading paper 2 39 4 12 problems feeding into 13 21 Multitasking 1 3 7 14 N Name changing 5 7 5 17 registering your 3 10 NO RX PAPER message 13 43 NO TEL message 13 43 NOT AVAILABLE message 13 43 Numbers changing 5 7 5 17 entering 3 2 storing 5 3 5 12 Numeric buttons explanation 2 27 O OFFHOOK ALARM setting 15 4 One touch speed dial list printing 12 9 sample 12 11 One touch speed
44. 31 2002 13 36 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC 001 k ase 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL LIST2 tt BEREE EEEE EE 08 CONNECTION TEL 732 2233 CONNECTION ID ADAM BOOKS CPA ay 2 SORTED TX TYPE REGULAR TX no l 06 CONNECTION TEL 761 1298 ke CONNECTION ID JOHN BARRISTER c TX TYPE REGULAR TX oO 2 01 CONNECTION TEL 1 914 438 3619 ct CONNECTION ID SEYMOUR GREEN fo TX TYPE REGULAR TX Ae ig Chapter 12 Reports and Lists 12 11 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s Guide 1 1100 book Page 12 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Coded Speed Dial List 12 31 2002 10 32 FAX 8334423 WORLD ESTATE INC 001 CODED SPEED DIAL LIST1 t NOT SORTED m NO CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID TX TYPE 01 555 1234 BILL REGULAR TX 02 1914 438 3619 SEYMOUR GREEN REGULAR TX 03 1516 911 4411 NATALIE SMITH REGULAR TX 04 1 617222322 HUNT INVESTMENTS REGULAR TX x 08 732 2233 ADAM BOOKS CPA REGULAR TX 12 31 2002 10 32 FAX 8334423 WORLD ESTATE INC 001 CODED SPEED DIAL LIST1 atk speak aback ake SORTED NO CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID TX TYPE x 08 732 2233 ADAM BOOKS CPA REGULAR TX 01 555 1234 BILL REGULAR TX x 04 1 617222322 HUNT INVESTMENTS REGULAR TX 03 1516 911 4411 NATALIE SMITH REGULAR TX 02 1914 438 3619 SEYMOUR GREEN REGULAR TX 12 12 Reports and Lists HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s Guide Chapter 12
45. 5 07 PM A a Chapter 4 Paper Handling This chapter describes how to select and prepare the print media for the different functions your machine can perform 1 Guidelines for Selecting Print Media sessssssssssssrttsssserttssserstsse 4 2 e Plan Papet scscvideies ci nens era ree aiee et onae o EEEE e ESE EE SRE AS 4 4 Envelopes asenaan eae eae rras e eeri oaee AASA R Era E aae Eade e SEAKS cadences 4 4 elo EA E E E A A aeeia ta 4 5 TransparencieSe enonsa e A E EEE E E a 4 5 a The Paper Path resni edeten in tatting siaine Feriae desiat eh iori 4 6 LY Selecting Paper Delivery ninripi aikee nare nienn aa 4 8 FaceDown Delivery aoso e REEE E E a 4 9 amp Bace Up Delivery sis dio eretet natrite taikiai issau k seri 4 10 H Loading Paper ipase cna EE E A EEEE 4 12 The Paper Ca ssettentos arisen iao Ke EE E EE as 4 12 The Multi Purpose Tray ogno a E o a eR E EEEa 4 12 D c LY Loading Envelopes in the Multi Purpose Tray ccccccccseeens 4 13 2 LY Changing a Paper Size from Letter to A4 Size Paper in the Paper k Cassettes rn eae e a a Aaa E a o a E cas 4 16 2 a LY Changing the Paper Size Setting ccccceeeeeeeesesteteeseeceneseseseens 4 19 The Paper Cassetten issir iie ee ies tas e EEES aiats 4 19 The Multi Purpose Tray ccccccccccccescseseeneneesesesneesesceeenessseenens 4 20 Chapter 4 Paper Handling 4 1 a AZ lls HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af
46. 8 7 a v ils mal A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 Deleting a Document Stored in Memory Follow this procedure to delete a document from memory Method 1 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel then press Memory Reference MTNDOC MEMORY LIST 2 Use A or V to select 4 DELETE DOCUMENT A y aa wEuge PE SBEN Er 3 Press Set Set 5 TL ENT oo 4 Use A or y to select the TX RX number you want to delete A oY So TL aaa tty LQ You can check the documents stored in memory by pressing lt or gt 1 If you are not sure of the TX RX number you want to delete print the list of documents stored in memory See page 8 2 for details 5 Press Set Set lt a OK YE Ai If you registered a password to prevent unauthorized access to the LA polling box settings use the numeric buttons to enter it and then press Note Set 8 8 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mal E t A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o 6 Press to delete the document or to cancel deleting SYMBOLS Q or Tone 7 Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD Method 2 no o 5 Eg is oO re 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel then press Delayed gt d fo E
47. A Nb A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A mi Printing Documents Stored in Memory Ai When you print a document stored in memory using the following LA procedure the print is reduced to 90 of the original Note Method 1 gt 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel then press Memory 23 Reference 22 neterence ait CS MEMORY REFERENCE 1 DOC MEMORY LIST 5 2 Use A or y to select 2 PRINT DOCUMENT A v MEMORY REFERENCE S 2 PRINT DOCUMENT 3 Press Set Set CS PRINT DOCUMENT TX RX NO 0001 4 Use A or Vy to select the TX RX number which you want to print oo PRINT DOCUMENT TX RX NO 0003 d You can check the documents stored in memory by pressing lt or gt 5 Press Set Set lt gt 1ST PG ONLY YES NO If you registered a password to prevent unauthorized access to the polling box settings use the numeric buttons to enter it and then press Note Set IN Chapter 8 Using the Memory Features 8 3 an v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o 6 Press for the first page only or for all pages WA TX RX NO 0003 Go PRINTING P 001 002 NT DOCUMENT RX NO PRI TX 7 Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD Method 2 When yo
48. BOX For details on accessing the settings below see page 15 13 Setting Description 1 SETUP FILE Set up a polling box to hold a document until it is polled by and sent to another machine See page 9 6 FILE NAME Enter a file name 24 characters PASSWORD Enter a password to protect the polling box settings TX PASSWORD Enter a 20 digit max ITU T password ERASE AFTER TX Set whether the machine erases a document after it has been polled ON Document is erased from the polling box after it is polled and sent OFF Document is not erased and remains in the polling box after it is polled and sent Sub Settings 0000 to 9999 ON OFF 2 CHANGE DATA Change the settings on the polling box You can now change any of the settings listed in the table above 1 SETUP FILE See page 9 11 PASSWORD Enter the password of the polling box You can now change any of the settings listed in the table above 1 SETUP FILE See page 9 11 3 DELETE FILE Delete the polling box file PASSWORD Enter the password of the polling box to delete Default settings are shown in bold type 15 14 The Menu System HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Chapter 15 Ei o uo A 1 1100 book Page 15 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM E Accessing the SYSTEM SETTINGS Menu 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Data Registration 3 Press Set
49. Co C CA Ai 1 You can select the paper cassette or the multi purpose tray when paper is remaining in both Note 1 Ifthe paper runs out while printing from the paper cassette or from the multi purpose tray the message LOAD PAPER appears in the LCD display You need to add paper and repeat the procedure from step 1 o 2 2 S dD x Chapter 11 Making Copies 11 3 a MWB als HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E 6 Press Start Copy to begin copying TEN COPYING 1 To stop copying press Stop You may then need to lift the operation panel to remove the document See Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 13 5 If MEMORY FULL appears in the display while you are making multiple i copies of a document you will not be able to use the multiple copy Note feature for copying the document Instead make single copies of the document as many times as required To correct this situation delete print or send any documents stored in memory See Documents Stored in Memory on page 8 2 A 11 4 Making Copies Chapter 11 a MIP HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Chapter 12 Reports and Lists This chapter describes how to print rep
50. ContraSt ce eee eee 6 13 Setting the Scanning Resolution c cccccceccecee cesses 6 13 Setting the Scan Contrast ccccecesesseneteeeceeeneseeceneeseseeneenes 6 14 Sending Methods ssi iassa saspi aiea KER canna 6 15 Manual Sending Via the Handset cccccceeesceneteeenenenes 6 15 Memory Sending senie ea en eE EE a R E 6 15 e Dialing Methods csiis ekaa I aKes 6 17 TE Sending Documents eper ioiei ei erea e 6 18 e Manual Sending Via the Handset ssssssssssssstsstsessesttssssestesstees 6 18 Memory Sending ccceccceccccesesssseesescecescsessenenesesesssnenssesceceneseseanens 6 20 LY Adding Pages to the Document in the Automatic Document Feeder ADE iisipan aee Es 6 22 LY Canceling Sendingene isre pi ienesis aiie ereta ratie giare ke Sear 6 23 e Removing the Document From the Automatic Document Feeder ADE sse seseneresen roinne 6 24 Be REI ANI a T A A A E 6 26 Manual Redialin g s tesi neni e e E a is i eia 6 26 e Automatic Redialing With Memory Sending ccccceeeeees 6 26 Canceling Automatic Redialing cccccecceeeeeeneeeenenenes 6 27 Setting Up Automatic Redialing cecsecseesseessseeseseeesnes 6 28 9 ire 2 g a Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 1 It eilo HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users Guide ANS KA Zs A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM TE Sequential Broad casting cccecccceceeeesesceteeseeceseteseeceneesesesneen
51. Default settings are shown in bold type 15 16 The Menu System Chapter 15 o HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af NZ GINS ps 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM a Appendix Specifications The specifications for the machine are listed in this section E General serani eenn e at hays de a EE e adh ede eee es A 2 Plain Paper Fax sinr seara aae eR rennin ESEE A 4 EV COpieh getire E E E A A EE E E ETE A 6 E Telephone moeras tees EEE e TE EAA a eke A 7 v Pinter eu eoa en a e ea E e E E E E R E a A 8 Printable Area Pap rSs grigiastro ai ei pi A 9 Printable Area EnvelopeS se sssssrsrssssrstessserstestsesresntesseentesssees A 10 E Document SIZES serne aeree ea ei E E REG E A 11 O PO Ihnterfacenereinni i e ete E aS A 13 EY Printer DIVET soitit edeekssvck ieceheiceseaededisvtasahdddevteste eivbeladeaieveay A 13 N c 2 E 5 2 Z Appendix Specifications A 1 a AZ lls HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af KA Zs A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM General Applicable line Compatibility Data compression system Modem type Modem speed Transmission speed Transmission reception memory Liquid crystal display Display languages Power source Power consumption Dimensions WxDxH Weight Environmental requirements Public Switched Telephone Net
52. ENTITY WITH RESPECT TO THE CARTRIDGE SHALL BIND CANON OR ANY DEALER SOME STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU NO WARRANTY IS GIVEN ON ANY USED CARTRIDGE This limited warranty does not apply to and does not guarantee any particular cartridge yield i e number of copies per Cartridge Cartridge yield will vary depending on average density of originals copied and other factors See Canon U S A s or Canon Canada s operator manual for the Product for further information This warranty is void and of no force and effect if the Cartridge is damaged as a result of a abuse neglect mishandling or alteration of the Cartridge a Product Accessory or a Product in which the Cartridge is incorporated electric current fluctuation exposure to light or accident b Improper use including failure to follow operating or maintenance instructions in or environmental conditions prescribed in Canon s operator s manual or other documentation c installation or repair by other than service representatives qualified by Canon who are acting in accordance with Canon s service bulletins or d use of supplies or parts other than those distributed by Canon which damage the Cartridge or cause abnormally frequent service calls or service problems Nor does this warranty extend to any Cartridge on which the original
53. IN T eee A 6 Telephone r a e E a a tin O AEEA A 7 Printe ieia aA iVE Traa S epr aya EIEKO ETASAN aei A 8 Printable Area Paperssscicccircisssstechisecrtastinatigaceerncaessesacotitedssaensaoaneonanas A 9 Printable Area Envelopes osseremnerin nieron n noe A 10 Document SIZES rinra a a E AA ia aaia A 11 PC Interface niran aa ar E aE eth bees A 13 Printer IOV er AEAT A AOE A A 13 Glossary E hia shat E ATEREA E e ieaie G 1 Tin Ox o a E E R E E E R ER R a I 1 Contents xix g HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users Guide ah ANS A 1 1100 book Page xx Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM NB XX Contents F SZ TUS HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Chapter 1 Introducing the Machine This chapter introduces you to the main features of the machine It also explains how to get the most out of the documentation that comes with the machine and gives important safety instructions m m Welcome reenn ie aeiiaaie eaa E aa rA SAE ii iei 1 2 The Main Features of the Machine cccccessssesesteteteseeeeseseseeeens 1 3 Plain Paper Fax Features c ccccccccccesceseneesessstessesceeenesesesnens 1 3 lt Printer Features ceca cat i a ee de NE i iTi 1 4 Copier Features ccc an retena Gans tro Re Tea ESENE AiE EAr Seah PESEE Eene PEERAA 1 5 Telephone Features orerirriei riniti
54. Lift the handset and dial the number Or Press Hook and dial the number Hook After you press Hook or pick up the handset the In Use Memory lamp indicates and you will be able to hear the dial tone TEL 2 887 0166 1 Use one of the dialing methods described on page 6 17 except Group Dialing 6 18 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af 7 a MIP mal A 1 1100 book Page 19 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B 3 Ifa person answers you can converse normally When you hear the other party answer pick up the handset so you can talk if you have not already done so Then go to step 4 Or If you hear a high pitched signal instead of the other party s voice they are ready to receive your document Go to step 6 4 Ask the other party to press the start button on their machine and then hang up their handset 5 After the other party presses the start button on their machine you will hear a high pitched signal 6 Press Start Copy on your machine and hang up your handset Start Copy x TX RX NO 0012 1 The LCD displays TX and the transmission number TX RX NO Ai Be sure to press Start Copy before you hang up or you will disconnect LA the call Note N se rg 2 mo 5 o Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 19 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 20 F
55. Memory Memory that is used for temporary storage of information such as documents you want to print scanned and received documents and downloaded fonts RECEIVE MODE The button that controls how the machine receives fax and telephone calls Receiving Receiving transmission is also defined as RX or Reception The machine can be customized to receive fax documents in many ways L1 Receive fax documents only FAX ONLY MODE 1 Receive both telephone calls and fax documents on the same line Fax Tel Mode LY Receive telephone calls and fax documents manually MANUAL MODE Reception See Receiving Redialing automatic See Automatic Redialing Redialing manual See Manual Redialing Reduction mode The machine s automatic feature that slightly reduces the received image to allow room at the top of the page for the sender s ID information You can also reduce the size of large incoming documents using the RX REDUCTION option Registering A process by which you place fax or telephone numbers and names in the machine s memory for automatic dialing so that you can save time dialing frequently called destinations G 8 Glossary o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Ei o SZ Zs A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM w ai Regular dialing Pressing the individual numeric buttons to dial a fax or telephone number Remote receiving ID
56. PM NB Sender ID Information printed at the top of a fax also called TTI or Transmit Terminal ID 1 Date and time the fax was sent 1 Sender s fax telephone number 1 Sender s name 1 Your name or company name 0 Page number Sending A fax document that has been scanned by a facsimile machine and sent over telephone lines in the form of electrical pulses to another facsimile machine Also called TX or Transmit Sending speed The rate at which faxes are transmitted through the telephone line See also bps bits per seconds STANDARD A document setting for sending normal typewritten or printed documents containing only text and no drawings photographs or illustrations Standby The mode in which the machine is on and ready to use All operations start from standby mode when the LCD displays the date and receiving mode T Timed sending See Delayed sending Tone A button that allows you to temporarily switch to touch tone from pulse dialing In some countries on line data services may require that you use tone dialing G 10 Glossary o F SZ TUS HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af A 1 1100 book Page 11 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Nip AS Tone pulse setting The ability to set the machine to match the telephone dialing system your telephone line uses touch tone or rotary pulse Toner A black resin coated powder contain
57. Press this button to enter pauses between digits when dialing or registering fax numbers Document feed lever Set this lever to the left a for automatic document feed or to the right 4 for manual document feed 2 26 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A 9 a A 1 1100 book Page 27 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM LCD display The LCD display shows messages and prompts during operation and displays selections text numbers and names when registering information In Use Memory lamp Indicates when the telephone line is being used or a document has been received in memory Alarm lamp This lamp flashes when an error occurs or when the machine is out of paper or toner E a amp Setting Up Your One Touch Speed Dialing buttons Use these buttons for one touch speed dialing Tone button Press this button to use tone dialing temporarily when your machine is set for pulse dialing See page 10 4 for details Numeric buttons Use these buttons to enter numbers and names when registering information and to dial fax telephone numbers that are not registered for automatic dialing Redial button Press this button to redial the last number that was dialed using the numeric button Hook button Allows you to dial even with the handset still in the handset cradle Receive Mode button Use this button to select the receiv
58. S Naaa lads 7 1 Different Ways to Receive a Fax s ss ssssssssssssssisrtissserttssssestesnterstenteestesntessees 7 2 PAN TED AUTO SW reinsar a aa a EAA i 7 2 FAXONLY MODE rania Eaa busses Aa anA 7 2 DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection eee eens 7 2 Setting the RXMODE ah asad tases assedtacainaitenaiianinaraeaesatedtiats 7 4 Setting the Receive Mode s ro iynis mersi En e E 7 5 Receiving Documents and Telephone Calls Automatically Fax TelMode noen e a e A e E 7 5 Setting Up Fax Tel Modernisert kis ret teine eiie oiak 7 5 What Happens When Fax Tel Mode is Selected cccceeeeeees 7 7 Receiving Faxes Manually MANUAL MODE c cccesssseseeeeteteeees 7 10 Receiving Faxes Automatically FAX ONLY MODE cccceceees 7 11 Using an Answering Machine ANS MACHINE MODE 7 12 Using the Machine with an Answering Machine ccsce 7 12 Documents Received in Memory ccseseseeesesseseteecececesescsnsnenenessseeneeneses 7 13 Messages Displayed When Documents are Received in Memory asis iroa teara aaee ASE AEE EEEE EA TEE ERSA a RETEA EEEE AE 7 13 Receiving While Registering Copying or Printing 7 14 Canceling an Incoming Fax cccccccccsesescsnsesesseceesescecesesesssnanseseseseenenesesees 7 15 Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD Feature 0 0 0 eee 7 16 Types of Ring Patterns irinse sias EAE EE SERERE Ee 7 16 Setting Up DRPD Mode irns er Eeri e 7 17 How DRPD Responds to Calls ccscseseseesceses
59. The multi purpose tray may contain too many sheets The multi purpose tray may contain more than one type of paper Solution Make sure the multi purpose tray is not filled past the limit See Chapter 4 Do not force the stack into the multi purpose tray Load only one type of paper at a time Make sure the paper you use meets the requirements for media given on page 4 2 Let the paper run out before you refill the multi purpose tray Avoid mixing new paper with paper remaining in the multi purpose tray Transparencies do not feed correctly The paper jams repeatedly The transparencies may not be loaded correctly The paper itself may be causing the jams Make sure you load no more than one transparency at a time Fan the paper before loading it in the multi purpose tray This keeps the sheets from sticking together Make sure the paper you are using meets the requirements given on page 4 2 13 22 Frequently Asked Questions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s A Chapter 13 L Ei a m SZ Zs Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 23 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Problem Possible cause Solution Envelopes will not feed The envelopes may not be Make sure the envelopes are loaded correctly loaded properly See page 4 13 o fa 2 D Ej Co Frequently Asked Make sure there are no more than 7 envelopes in the
60. The two digit code that enables you to manually activate fax reception using a telephone that is connected to the machine Remote reception Activating fax reception by answering a telephone that is connected to the machine but that is not located near the machine You need to dial a remote receiving ID number to start remote reception Report A document printed by the machine and containing information about the faxes it has sent or received Resolution The density of dots for any given output device Expressed in terms of dots per inch dpi Low resolution causes font characters and graphics to have a jagged appearance Higher resolution means smoother curves and angles as well as a better match to traditional typeface designs Resolution values are represented by horizontal data and vertical data for example 360 x 360 dpi This machine produces output with 600 x 600 dpi precision Rotary pulse A telephone dialing system where a dial is rotated to send pulses to the telephone switching system When you pulse dial you hear clicks When you touch tone dial the most common dialing system you hear tones Rotary pulse dialing requires certain setting adjustments RX A See Receiving 9 5 S Scanning contrast A setting that darkens or lightens the scanning of documents Glossary G 9 m v US HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af AS A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07
61. allows you to send a fax to a sequence of up to 125 fax numbers using any combination of dialing methods as follows m m m One Touch Speed Dialing up to 24 destinations Coded Speed Dialing up to 100 destinations Regular Dialing 1 destination only with the numeric buttons or Redial You can enter the One Touch Speed Dialing and Coded Speed Dialing destinations in any order You can also include one destination that you dial manually using the numeric buttons or by pressing Redial To send a fax to more than one location do the following Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document See page 6 6 for details Note 1 Prepare the document and load it face down into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 1 Ifnecessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast See page 6 13 for details 2 Enter up to 125 fax destinations using any of the following three methods 1 One Touch Speed Dialing Press the desired One Touch Speed Dialing button s ac ac Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 31 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af 7 N o xs re Da i lt j ne c O 72 a v ils mal A 1 1100 book Page 32 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E 1 Coded Speed Dialing Press Coded Dial then enter the two digit code 00 99 using the numeric buttons i e Be sure to press Coded Dial before each code 1 Regular Dialing
62. and operate your machine be sure to do the following LY Read this chapter to learn about the machine s main features and for guidelines on using the machine safely 1 Carefully follow the instructions in Chapter 2 to get your machine unpacked and assembled properly 1 Read Chapter 3 to learn how to enter information in the machine and to register your user information 1 Read Chapter 4 to learn about the types of print media you can use with your machine and for instructions on selecting paper delivery and loading paper 1 Read Chapter 5 to learn how to register numbers for speed dialing how to change them and how to use speed dialing to send faxes 1 Read Chapter 6 through 11 to master the machine operating procedures such as sending faxes receiving faxes and making copies and to learn more about its special features such as restricting use of the machine and special dialing features LY Refer to Chapter 12 to learn about the reports and lists that can be automatically or manually printed from your machine 1 If your machine begins operating improperly use Chapter 13 to try to solve the problem 1 8 Introducing the Machine Chapter 1 a AY Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM I Look over Chapter 14 to become familiar with procedures for cleaning your machine and replacing the toner cartridge
63. and time and all other settings currently selected Follow this procedure to print the User s Data List 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Report Report REPORT 1 ACTIVITY REPORT 3 Use A or V to select 3 USER DATA LIST aon REPORT 3 USER DATA LIST 4 Press Set os ao REPORT 12 14 Reports and Lists Chapter 12 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mal B e 1 1100 book Page 15 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 12 31 2002 13 36 FAX 8334423 WORLD ESTATE INC lA 001 USER S DATA LIST kak sees 1 USER SETTINGS UNIT TELEPHONE 8334423 UNIT NAME WORLD ESTATE INC TX TERMINAL ID TTI POSITION OUTSIDE IMAGE TELEPHONE MARK FAX NG CONTRAST STANDARD ERASE A 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS RX RESTRICTION OFF DATE SETUP MM DD YYYY DISPLAY LANGUAGE ENGLISH TX START SPEED 33600bps RX START SPEED 33600bps DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME ON START DATE TIME MONTH APRIL WEEK FIRST WEEK DAY SUNDAY TIME 02 00 END DATE TIME MONTH OCTOBER WEEK LAST WEEK DAY SUNDAY TIME 02 00 TOTAL FAX MEMORY 4 096MByte no 2 2 l xe oO z 2 fo a 0 Chapter 12 Reports and Lists 12 15 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users Guide A 1 1100 book Page 16 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f o Doc Memory List 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Pres
64. and you will hear the dial tone Hook TEL 2 Dial the telephone number using the numeric buttons 1 The machine connects using the pulses required by your telephone line 3 Press Tone to switch to tone dialing Tone 1 When Tone is pressed T is displayed in the LCD 1 Numbers entered after pressing Tone will be dialed using tone dialing 4 When you have finished hang up the handset Or Press Hook Hook 10 4 Special Features Chapter 10 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af L B Nb mal A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E When registering One Touch Speed Dialing and Coded Speed Dialing numbers if you enter Tone after the number you will switch to tone Note dialing after the phone connection is made Example Operation OOO Display TELEPHONE NUMBER TEL 123456pppT 3_ IN f N Pause Pause Pause Tone Tone After the number 123456 is dialed it will pause for 6 seconds ppp to allow the other party to answer and then it will switch to tone T Now you can follow the instructions that were recorded by the party you called no o b o ne S 5 Q Q 7 Chapter 10 Special Features 10 5 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A 9 Restricting Reception By enabling this feature you can restrict reception of faxes to o
65. currently supports 28 8Kbps modem speeds or lower depending on telephone line conditions Preface iii a HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A MIP Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page iv Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM LEGAL LIMITATION ON USAGE OF YOUR PRODUCT AND THE USE OF IMAGES Using your product to scan print or otherwise reproduce certain documents and the use of such images as scanned printed or otherwise reproduced by your product may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and or civil liability A non exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below This list is intended to be a guide only If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan print or otherwise reproduce any particular document and or of the use of the images scanned printed or otherwise reproduced you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance e Paper money e Money orders e Certificates of deposit e Postage stamps canceled or uncanceled Identifying badges or insignias e Selective service or draft papers e Checks or drafts issued by governmental agencies e Motor vehicle licenses and certificates of title e Traveler s checks e Food stamps e Passports e Immigration papers e Internal revenue stamps canceled or uncanceled e Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness Stock certificates Copyrighted works works of art without permission of copyright owne
66. dialing buttons 2 27 changing names 5 7 changing numbers 5 7 description 5 2 list 12 11 One touch speed dialing 5 2 5 3 storing numbers 5 3 using 5 10 One Touch Speed Dialing buttons explanation 2 27 Index HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae ml o SZ Zs Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Operation panel 2 23 2 26 entering information via 3 2 Output slots jams 13 7 P Paper guides 2 23 jams 13 5 loading 2 39 4 12 loading label 2 5 2 10 path 4 6 recording 2 39 release lever 2 24 13 11 13 20 rest 2 11 2 23 selecting 4 2 4 4 size 4 2 weight 4 2 Paper delivery face down delivery 4 8 4 9 face up delivery 4 8 4 10 paper path 4 6 selecting 4 8 selector 2 23 4 9 4 10 Paper loading label 2 5 attaching 2 10 PAPER SIZE setting 15 12 Pause entering 10 3 PBX 10 2 Plain paper fax 1 3 PLEASE WAIT message 2 20 Polling before polling receiving 9 2 before polling to send 9 6 canceling polling box setup 9 13 changing polling box setup 9 11 to receive 9 3 POLLING BOX accessing the menu 15 13 15 14 setting 9 6 Power cord 2 5 connecting 2 19 Power cut 13 37 Power Switch 2 10 Print media envelopes 4 3 4 4 labels 4 3 4 5 paper 4 2 4 4 selecting 4 2 transparencies 4 3 Print quality problems 13 35 Printer driver 1 6 1 8 A 13 G 7 PRINTER SETTINGS menu accessing 15 11 description 3 6 settings 15 12 Printing list of documents i
67. distance dialing the location and length of the pause may differ depending on the telephone system How to Enter Pauses Use this procedure to enter pauses within or at the end of numbers 1 During dialing registration when you come to a step that asks you to enter a number for dialing use the numeric buttons to enter the number 2 To enter a pause within a number press Pause Pause 1 To enter a pause at the end of a number press Pause and then press Set I A pause entered within a number p is two seconds long 7 Q b ne S O Q Q 7 LI If necessary you can adjust the length of a pause within a number See pages 15 7 and 15 8 MID PAUSE SET setting for more details I To make a longer pause within a number press Pause again Each pause adds two seconds to the length of the pause 1 A pause at the end of a number P is fixed to ten seconds Chapter 10 Special Features 10 3 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A uo A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Using Tone Dialing On a Pulse Line Even if you have a pulse line the machine enables you to use tone dialing once you have connected to the number you are calling This lets you take advantage of many services that require tones such as selecting options from telephone touch tone services 1 Lift the handset Or Press Hook The In Use Memory lamp indicates
68. e 22ic0 32S n fe bc a Minden seid 7 5 Setting Up Fax Tel Mode suiii aeiae 7 5 What Happens When Fax Tel Mode is Selected 0 4 7 7 e Receiving Faxes Manually MANUAL MODE ccc 7 10 e Receiving Faxes Automatically FAX ONLY MODE 04 7 11 e Using an Answering Machine ANS MACHINE MODE 7 12 Using the Machine with an Answering Machine 7 12 LY Documents Received in Memory cccesteteeseeeeteseeeeceteseseenaenes 7 13 e Messages Displayed When Documents are Received in Memory isois e o ai 7 13 e Receiving While Registering Copying or Printing 7 14 LY Canceling an Incoming Fax cccccccceccccseeseensnsesesesneesesceeeneseseenans 7 15 I Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD Feature 004 7 16 Types of Ring Patten Ssn ptre ee an a A R ih 7 16 Setting Up DRPD Mode s ssn ssssssssssssestesssesttnterstenteesntentesssentesnseen 7 17 e How DRPD Responds to Calls ccccccceesesseeesesteteesceeenesesesens 7 22 The Machine Set for Automatic Switching Between Fax and Telephone Calls Srece deisi edireitea eoat i 7 22 Chapter 7 Receiving Faxes 7 1 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae a o O x lt in dD 2 D D as a AZ lls Ei AS NB A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Different Ways to Receive a Fax The machine provides you with several modes for r
69. extension telephone 15 10 The Menu System HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Chapter 15 o Ei A 1 1100 book Page 11 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Accessing the PRINTER SETTINGS Menu 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGSTRATION 3 Press Set Set DATA REGSTRATION lt 1 USER SETTINGS A 4 Use A or V to select 5 PRINTER SETTINGS 2 7 4S DATA REGSTRATION 5 PRINTER SETTINGS 5 Press Set then use the A or V to display the item you want to set or change Chapter 15 The Menu System 15 11 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 12 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM PRINTER SETTTINGS For details on accessing the settings below see page 15 11 Setting Description Sub Settings 1 RX REDUCTION Enables disables reduction of documents to fit on the paper ON loaded in the multi purpose tray or cassette OFF If you select ON you can select the direction of the reduction VERTICAL ONLY HORIZ amp VERTICAL 2 PAPER SIZE Select the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette or the multi purpose tray CASSETTE Select the size of paper you are loading in the LTR A4 paper cassette MP TRAY Select the size of paper you are loading on the LTR LGL CUSTOM multi purpose tray
70. for its products Be sure to read this warranty information If you have a problem with the machine s operation try to solve it by referring to the information in Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions If you cannot solve the problem or if you think your machine needs service contact your local authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer If you think your machine needs service only an authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer will do warranty service You must have your sales receipt for warranty service N Note 1 10 Introducing the Machine Chapter 1 a AY Is HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 11 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Safety Instructions Caution Read these safety instructions thoroughly before using your machine and keep them handy in case you need to refer to them later Except as specifically described in this user s guide do not attempt to service the machine yourself Never attempt to disassemble the machine opening and removing its interior covers will expose you to dangerous voltages and other risks For all service contact your local authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer Always follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine Use the machine only ona sturdy stable level surface If the machine falls it could be seriously damaged Do not use the machine near water If you spill liquid on or into the
71. in any of these situations Caution m m If the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed If liquid spills into the machine or if it is otherwise exposed to rain or liquids If you notice smoke or unusual noises or odor coming from it If the machine does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions in this user s guide or you can damage the machine and require extensive repair work If the machine is dropped or its cabinet is damaged If the machine begins performing poorly and you cannot correct the problem by following the procedures in Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions This product emits low level electromagnetic waves If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities please move away from this product and consult your doctor Chapter 1 Introducing the Machine 1 13 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Cd x Do fr ox So oH o2 i Ei m V US KA Zs A 1 1100 book Page 14 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a 1 14 Introducing the Machine Chapter 1 HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af aa AY Is Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine This chapter tells you how to unpack assemble and connect your machine install the FX
72. into a single convenient desktop unit g2 c Q Plain Paper Fax Machine 1 Printer LY Copier LY Telephone The machine s multitasking ability enables you to perform a number of operations simultaneously For example you can print a document or make copies at the same time you are sending a fax or receiving a fax into memory The compact size of the machine makes it ideal for desktop use and allows you to use it in places where other machines may not fit Plain Paper Fax Features UHQ Image Processing System The machine uses Canon s Ultra High Quality Image Processing System to provide enhanced definition in faxed photos Error Correction Mode ECM Using the machine s Error Correction Mode ECM reduces transmission errors when sending faxes to or receiving faxes from other fax machines that also have ECM capability Automatic switching between fax and voice calls The machine can automatically distinguish between fax calls and normal telephone calls so that you can receive both through a single telephone line Answering machine connection You can connect an answering machine to the machine to let it receive telephone messages and faxes while you are away from your desk Chapter 1 Introducing the Machine 1 3 aa AY lls HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af AS A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM NB Transmission speed The machine uses G3 data e
73. is not installed correctly the received document image might shift or the recording paper might jam Machine d J o gt a a c Q 7 If you have difficulty inserting the paper cassette after removing it completely disconnect the power cord wait five seconds and then reconnect it When the PLEASE WAIT message is no longer displayed try inserting the paper cassette again If you pull out the paper cassette with paper remaining in the cassette be sure to check the following before reinserting it Make sure no paper is out of the cassette Make sure there is no loose paper inside the machine If the paper cassette sticks when you try inserting it in the machine remove it from the machine and open the front cover Then close it and try reinserting the paper cassette Chapter 2 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Setting Up Your Machine 2 43 a MWB als A 1 1100 book Page 44 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray Follow these steps to load paper in the multi purpose tray Let the paper run out before you refill the multi purpose tray See page 2 IN 39 Note 1 Before loading paper stack it so that the leading edge and sides of the paper are even 2 Open the paper guides to the approximate width of the stack of paper 2 44 Setting Up You
74. longer than five minutes Do not open the drum protective shutter on the cartridge If the drum surface is exposed to light and damaged print quality may deteriorate MET al tals d J o gt a a c Q 7 Do not stand the cartridge on end and do not turn it upside down If toner becomes caked in the cartridge it may prove impossible to free it even by shaking the cartridge Keep the cartridge away from computer screens disk drives and floppy disks The magnet inside the cartridge may harm these items Never touch the drum protective shutter When holding the cartridge avoid touching the drum protective shutter with your hands Hold the cartridge as shown so that your hand is not touching the drum s protective shutter Do not store the cartridge in direct sunlight Avoid locations subject to high temperature high humidity or rapid changes in temperature Store the cartridge between 32 and 95 F 0 and 35 C Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 31 SZ HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 32 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 1 Store the cartridge in its protective bag Do not open the bag until you are ready to install the cartridge in the machine 1 Save the protective bag You may need to repack and transport the cartridge at a later date 1 Do not stor
75. lot numbers or dating have been defaced removed or altered THER CANON NOR ANY DEALER SHALL BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE LESS CAUSED SOLELY AND DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF CANON OR ANY DEALER LOSS OF UE OR PROFIT FAILURE TO REALIZE SAVINGS OR OTHER BENEFITS EXPENDITURES FOR TITUTE EQUIPMENT OR SERVICES LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA STORAGE CHARGES OR OTHER AL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE E CARTRIDGE REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED AND EVEN OR ANY DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES NOR SHAL COVERY OF ANY KIND AGAINST CANON OR ANY DEALER BE GREATER IN AMOUNT THAN THE PURCHAS CE OF THE CARTRIDGE CAUSING THE ALLEGED DAMAGE WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING TH RCHASER ASSUMES ALL RISKS AND LIABILITY FOR LOSS DAMAGE OR INJURY TO PERSONS A OPERTY OF THE PURCHASER OR OTHERS ARISING OUT OF THE POSSESSION USE MISUSE O ABILITY TO USE ANY CARTRIDGE SOLD BY CANON NOT CAUSED SOLELY AND DIRECTLY BY TH CE OF CANON OR ANY DEALER THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THA E ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE CARTRIDGE cm mme Qam 22 5S vig ame 1 WC TI 1 5 mo mavomm Cm Q ee Q m s limited warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to e or province to province
76. machine connecting 2 18 jack 2 25 receiving mode 7 12 receiving with 7 3 Area scanning 6 5 Assembling machine 2 10 Attaching extension tray 2 11 handset 2 13 paper loading label 2 10 support tray 2 12 AUTO REDIAL description 6 26 message 13 38 setting 15 8 Automatic document feed document requirements 6 3 loading documents 6 7 selecting 6 6 Automatic Document Feeder ADF 2 23 adding pages 6 22 jams 13 5 removing document 6 24 Automatic redialing canceling 6 27 Automatic redialling setting up 6 28 B Broadcasting sequential 6 31 BUSY NO SIGNAL message 13 38 C Calling restricting 10 6 CALLING VOLUME setting 15 4 Canceling automatic redialing 6 27 manual redialing 6 26 sending 6 23 CHANGE CARTRIDGE message 2 33 13 39 Index HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users ae I 1 V US KA Zs A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 6 03 PM CHECK COVER CART message 2 21 13 39 CHECK DOCUMENT message 13 39 CHECK PAPER SIZE message 13 39 CHECK POLLING ID message 13 40 CHECK PRINTER message 13 40 CHK SUBADDR PSWD massage 13 41 Cleaning exterior 14 2 inside of machine 14 3 scanner components 14 6 CLEAR PAPER JAM message 7 13 13 41 Coded Dial button explanation 2 26 Coded speed dial list printing 12 9 sample 12 12 12 13 Coded speed dialing changing numbers names 5 17 description 5 2 storing numbers 5 12 using 5 21 Components 2 23 attaching 2 10 cleaning
77. multi purpose tray The correct envelope size Make sure you select the may not be selected in your correct envelope size in the printer driver Paper Setting dialog box on your PC See the printer driver manual The envelopes may not meet Envelopes must be U S the machine specifications Commercial No 10 9 5 x 4 1 in or European DL 220 x 110 mm Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 23 aa AY lls HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 24 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Faxing Problems Use the following tables to solve problems that can occur when sending and receiving faxes with the machine Sending Faxes Problem Possible cause Solution Cannot send a fax The machine may have If you suspect this overheated and shut itself disconnect the power cord down and let it cool for several The machine may not be set for the type of telephone line you have pulse tone The document may not have been set correctly in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF The one touch or coded speed dialing number you used may not be registered The receiving machine may be out of paper minutes Then reconnect it and try sending again Make sure the machine is set for the type of telephone line you have See page 3 12 If you are not sure what type of line you have contact your local telephone company Remove the document stack it
78. number s and a telephone number s for your machine using only one telephone line Your machine will automatically detect incoming calls Based on the distinctive ring pattern the machine knows if the call is from a fax machine trying to send a document or from a telephone trying to make a voice call This feature is called Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD Use the information in this section to set up the machine for use with a DRP service For more details on the DRP service contact your local telephone company Your telephone company may have a different name for this service Also this service may not be offered in all areas Types of Ring Patterns Your telephone company will assign a distinctive ring pattern to each number when you order the DRP service The setting you make with the following procedure must match the setting assigned by the telephone company 7 16 Receiving Faxes Chapter 7 m SZ Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af A 1 1100 book Page 17 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A mi You can set the machine to select among the following ring patterns LY Normal ring Ring type of normal telephone line g 0 Double ring Two short rings at regular intervals 0 Short short long Short short long at regular intervals 3 O Short long short Short long short at regular intervals amp I Other ring type Patterns other than those described above I FAX TEL
79. o o dD D Transmission rrancete DELAYED TX T REGISTER 2 Use A or V to select 2 DELETE FILE S DELAYED TX 2 DELETE FILE 3 Press Set Set C O 0001 4 Use A or y to select the TX RX number you want to delete oo DELAYED TX TX RX NO 0003 LQ You can check the documents stored in memory by pressing lt or gt 1 If you are not sure of the TX RX number you want to delete print the list of documents stored in memory See page 8 2 for details 5 Press Set Set C OK TO DELETE YES NO Chapter 8 Using the Memory Features 8 9 m HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A v ils A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B 6 Press to delete the document or to cancel deleting SYMBOLS Oe Tone 7 Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD 8 10 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Chapter 9 Setting Up and Using Polling This chapter shows you how to set up and use polling sending and receiving Polling is useful when one or both parties cannot be in the office at the same time LI Whatiis Polling 2 pareisse i ces aer E a EE connate denned 9 2 e Before
80. or a fax machine trying to send a document If your machine does not have enough time to detect the fax tone it assumes the call is from a telephone Use the RING START TIME setting to increase the time the machine takes to check whether a call is from a fax machine or a telephone You can select a time between 0 and 30 seconds the default is 8 seconds Chapter 7 Receiving Faxes 7 5 an v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A AS NB A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a 1 F T RING TIME When your machine is set to receive both fax and telephone calls automatically it rings to alert you to pick up the handset if the call is from a person If you do not pick up the handset within a certain amount of time the machine stops ringing Use this option to change the number of times the machine rings from 10 to 45 seconds The default is 15 seconds 1 DEFAULT ACTION Not all fax machines are capable of sending a fax tone the CNG tone that warns the receiving machine that a fax is coming For those cases the machine may think that the call coming in is a voice call and rings to alert you of the call the amount of time it rings is determined by the F T RING TIME setting above If you do not answer the call one of two things can happen 1 If you set the DEFAULT ACTION to RECEIVE the machine switches to fax receive mode automatically at that point and starts to receive
81. or the telephone rings pick up the receiver If you hear a person s voice 2 Start your conversation If the caller wants to send a document after talking to you ask them to press the start button on their machine When you hear a beep press Start Copy to begin receiving the document then hang up If you hear a slow beep or silence 2 A fax machine is trying to send you a document Press Start Copy on the machine then hang up Or Enter the two digit ID code from the telephone then hang up OO d The machine then begins receiving the document This is particularly convenient if your telephone is located away from the machine 7 10 Receiving Faxes Chapter 7 an MIP HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nip AS m A 1 1100 book Page 11 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM If you do not hang up after pressing Start Copy or the two digit ID code the machine beeps intermittently for a few seconds after you receive the document You can turn the beeping off by disabling the OFFHOOK ALARM in the USER SETTINGS menu See pages 15 3 and 15 4 for details N If you have an answering machine connected to your machine that can carry out remote control operations controlling your answering machine Note from a remote telephone the security code for this function may be the same as the two digit ID code described above If so make sure you change the machine two digit ID code to make it distinct fro
82. press Set Set PASSWORD 8 Use the numeric buttons to enter a four digit password PASSWORD 1147 Chapter 9 Setting Up and Using Polling 9 7 a J SZ HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A f A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 Press Set SETUP FILE 3 TX PASSWORD 10 If you don t want to enter the ITU T password press the A or V to display the next item and go to step 13 Or If you want to enter an ITU T password press Set TX PASSWORD 11 Use the numeric buttons to enter the ITU T password TX PASSWORD 12345676 An ITU T password is a number up to 20 digits long which can include spaces and the symbols and 12 Press Set SETUP FILE 4 ERASE AFTER TX 13 Press Set ERASE AFTER TX ON 14 Use A or y to select ON or OFF A y CoO ON The document in the polling box is erased after it is sent once in response to polling by another machine OFF The document in the polling box is not erased after it is polled Select this setting if you expect the document will be polled by more than one machine 9 8 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 9 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af E mal t A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E 15 Press Set Set 16 Press Stop to return to standby mode
83. receive quickly or if you know your local lines are in good condition See pages 15 9 and 15 10 ECM RX setting If your local lines are in bad condition ECM transmissions may take longer than normal transmissions Turn off ECM if you find transmission speed extremely slow and need to transmit quickly or if you know your local lines are in good condition See pages 15 7 and 15 8 ECM TX setting Load paper in the paper cassette the multi purpose tray Any documents received in memory will then be printed automatically 13 42 Frequently Asked Questions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Chapter 13 L Ei a 7 A 1 1100 book Page 43 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Message Error Code Cause Action MEMORY FULL 037 The machine s Print out any memory is full documents that are because it has stored in memory received too many Then start the documents or a operation again See very long or page 8 2 detailed document The memory is full Divide the because you sent document and send too many pagesat each part separately once or a very long If the memory or detailed contains any faxes document you do not need print send or delete them MEMORY USED nn Shows how much of If you need more the machine s space wait for the memory is in use machine to send any faxes Also print send or delete any documents in memory you no longer need
84. rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of Canon Inc ii Preface HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae o SZ TUS Ei A 1 1100 book Page iii Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Trademarks Canon is a registered trademark and UHQ is a trademork of Canon Inc IBM is a registered trademark Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other brand and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies As an ENERGY STAR Partner Canon has determined that the machine meets the Energy Star lorus guidelines for energy efficiency EPA POLLUTION PREVENTER Super G3 is a phrase used to describe the new SUPER generation of fax machines that use ITU T V 34 standard 33 6Kbps modems Super G3 High Speed The Fax machines allow transmission time of approximately 3 seconds per page which results in HIGH SPEED FACSIMILE reduced telephone line charges Approximately 3 seconds per page fax data transmission time based on ITU T No 1 Chart Standard Mode at 33 6Kbps modem speed The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN
85. s sin e e A E 13 25 The machine cannot send a fax using ECM c cesceeteteseeeeees 13 25 Errors occur frequently while sending faxes cccseceeeeees 13 26 Faxing Problems Receiving FaxeS ccccscscseiesescesesesescenenesesesnaneeneses 13 27 The machine cannot receive faxes automatically cccceeee 13 27 The machine will not switch between telephone and fax calls Automatically senos casita vee aera aa cesses ets 13 27 The machine will not receive faxes manually ccseceeeeeees 13 28 The print quality is poor c cesceceeesceseseeeecenesestsneneneseseeeeteeeeeeenes 13 28 The machine cannot receive faxes using ECM ccceeeeeeees 13 29 Nothing prints erei oer etea ei iarna se ee e ETE R nails 13 29 Received faxes are blotched or uneven ssssesssssssrsrsstsessessesssees 13 29 Errors occur frequently while receiving cceseeeeteteteeeeees 13 30 Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 3 It eilo HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users Guide ANS NZ GINS ps 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM a Problem See page Telephone Problems c esccececcccssesescetsnesesesesneesesesceseseseecanenesesesnaeneneees 13 31 The machine cannot dial cceccceesee sees sessesseseeesssssseeseseseesenees 13 31 Copying Problems ccecccescccssesesessensneesesneneesescecesesesssnensnesesesnenenesees 13 32 The machine will not make a COPY cccccsc
86. scanner 14 6 Confirming dialtone 10 4 Connecting answering machine 2 18 extension telephone 2 18 power cord 2 19 telephone line 2 17 Contrast DARKER 6 14 LIGHTER 6 14 setting 6 14 STANDARD 6 14 Conventions type 1 9 Copying 11 2 features 1 5 problems 13 32 receiving while 7 14 resolution 11 2 Cover front 2 23 2 24 Cursor button explanation 2 30 Customer support 13 2 D Date entering 3 9 DATE amp TIME setting 3 9 15 4 DAYLGHT SAV TIME setting 15 16 DEFAULT ACTION setting 7 7 15 1 Delayed sending 6 34 sending during 6 36 Delayed Transmission button explanation 2 29 Deleting document in memory 8 8 Dialing coded speed 5 2 5 12 6 17 group 5 2 5 23 6 17 long distance 10 3 methods 6 17 one touch speed 5 2 5 3 6 17 regular 6 17 special 10 2 speed 5 1 2 Index HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Ei SZ TUS Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM through switchboard 10 2 tone 10 4 tone dialing on a pulse line 10 4 Dimensions machine 2 4 DISPLAY LANGUAGE setting 15 16 Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD 7 2 7 16 DOC TOO LONG message 13 41 Document adding pages in ADF 6 22 guides 2 23 identifying your 3 8 inmemory 7 13 8 2 loading 6 7 loading for automatic feed 6 7 loading for manual feed 6 11 problem 6 4 quantity 6 3 removing from ADF 6 24 requirements 6 3 scanning area 6 5 sending 6 18 size 6 3 storedinmemor
87. scanning area Make sure your document s text and graphics do not extend into these margins Max o 16 4 MAX 4 0 mm LETTER LEGAL A4 Y MAX 0 16 EJ MAX 4 0 mm gt e He MAX 0 12 MAX 0 12 MAX 3 0 mm MAX 3 0 mm N o xs Le a mo c Q z Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 5 a HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A v ils A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Selecting Automatic Manual Document Feed With machine you can select whether you want to scan documents automatically or manually Automatic document feed is used when scanning multipage documents on normal paper Use manual document feed when scanning single page documents such as photos business cards or documents on other special types of paper Manual document feed will allow you to scan your document with minimum damage to the surface of the document Use the document feed lever located at the top of the operation panel to select automatic document feed or manual document feed t A A Canol Automatic document feed gt ee A lt lt 6 Cano Manual document feed Ai Selecting manual document feed the document feed lever is set to LA automatic document feed automatically after sending a document Note 6 6 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af
88. the Multi Purpose Tray cccceseeeeees 2 44 E Testing the Machine isei ispiser ii isieeieri e erien e 2 46 2 2 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae a m SZ Zs Ei A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM SA ZIN Choosing a Location for Your Machine Before unpacking your machine follow these guidelines to choose an appropriate location for it Please review the information provided in Safety Instructions on page 1 11 to 1 13 to make sure you are installing your machine for safe use Caution 1 Put the machine in a cool dry clean well ventilated place a amp e Make sure the area is free from dust Setting Up Your e Make sure the location is not affected by extreme temperature fluctuations and remains between 50 and 90 5 F 10 and 32 5 C e Make sure the area s relative humidity is always between 20 and 80 I Keep the machine away from direct sunlight 11 If possible place the machine near an existing telephone outlet to allow for an easy connection of the telephone line to the machine 1 Place the machine near an electrical wall outlet that provides 120 127 V AC 60 Hz power This is standard for U S outlets if you have any doubts contact an electrician to check the power for you LY Place the machine near the PC you will be connecting it
89. the document If no document comes in it disconnects the call after approximately 45 seconds The factory default setting is RECEIVE 2 Ifyou set the DEFAULT ACTION to DISCONNECT the machine disconnects the telephone call immediately freeing up your phone line at this point 7 6 Receiving Faxes Chapter 7 a AY Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM What Happens When Fax Tel Mode is Selected Type of call Telephone Fax Fax Sending document Sending document manually automatically Telephone charges The machine answers without ringing begin for caller The machine listens for fax tone For 8 sec RING START TIME fax tone setting 8 sec automatically fax tone is detected and the machine switches to receive mode The machine starts ringing Pick up the F T RING TIME handset to talk Factory default setting 15 sec If you do not pick up the handset within 15 sec DEFAULT ACTION Choose between DISCONNECT RECEIVE factory default setting and DISCONNECT The machine Rea eae disconnects the call RECEIVE Factory default setting Not all fax machines are capable of sending a fax tone For those cases if you set the DEFAULT ACTION to RECEIVE the machine switches to receive mode automatically and starts receiving the document If no document comes in it disconnects after approximately 45 seconds You can
90. two digit code 00 to 99 under which you have registered the number you want to send to See Chapter 5 Speed Dialing for details on registering and using Coded Speed Dialing 1 Group Dialing Send a document to a pre defined group of fax numbers The numbers must already be stored as One Touch Speed Dialing numbers or Coded Speed Dialing numbers See Chapter 5 Speed Dialing for details on registering and using Group Dialing Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 17 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L no o x ra Da c ne c Q 2 E a v US f A 1 1100 book Page 18 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Sending Documents This section describes the different ways to send faxes with machine Manual Sending Via the Handset IN Note You can send faxes manually This allows you to talk to the other party via the handset before sending the fax which can be useful if the other party uses a single line for both voice and fax transmissions Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document See page 6 6 for details Prepare the document and load it face down into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 11 Once the document is loaded the LCD display shows the following MEMORY USED 0 DOCUMENT READY 1 Ifnecessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast See page 6 13 for details
91. use Be very careful not to touch it Caution PRECAUCIONI ATTENZIONE ALTA TEMPERATURA DEFA ETGEN 13 12 Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 13 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 13 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o If the paper has jammed near the multi purpose tray slot Hold the machine steady and pull the jammed paper straight out from the machine Do not tear the jammed paper If the paper tears remove the paper scraps from the machine Be careful not to spill the toner that is on the jammed sheet of paper The toner has not been fused to the paper yet and toner spilled inside the machine may adversely affect the print quality I Be careful not to get toner on your hands or clothing If you do wash it off immediately with cold water IN Note m Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 13 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af o fa 2 D Ej Co Frequently Asked mal i Bi a MIP A 1 1100 book Page 14 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 If the top edge of the paper is in the fixing assembly First move the jammed paper towards the machine Q then pull it towards you to remove it Be very careful not to touch the fixing assembly shaded as it becomes extremely hot during use Caution FIXING ASSEMBLY 13 14 Frequently Asked Qu
92. you want to change or delete Coded Dial CODED SPEED DIAL 432 04 1 432 2060 1 If the code you select is registered for group dialing GROUP DIAL is displayed 8 Press Set twice Se CODED SPEED DIAL 1 TELEPHONE NUMBER TELEPHONE NUMBER TEL 1 432 2060_ To delete a number 9 Press Clear to delete the number then press Set 5 S oo NUMBER 1 When you delete a number the name registered for that number is also deleted 10 Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop 5 18 Speed Dialing Chapter 5 eo HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 19 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 To change the number and or name 9 To change the number press Clear and re enter the number You can also use lt to delete the rightmost digit and enter the correct number TELEP ee NUMBER TEL 2 50921_ 4 The telephone fax number can be up to 120 digits long 1 If you only want to change the name ignore this step and go to step 10 10 Press Set twice to display the registered name Set Set Co CS CODED SPEED DIAL 2 NAME NAME A Canon U S A NY 11 To change the name use lt gt and the numeric buttons to enter the new name over the previous name NAME Canon CANADA You can also delete the name by pressing Clear For details on entering letters see page 3 2 You can enter
93. your handset 2 16 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 a Nb HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 17 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A mi Making Connections A Note Be sure to connect any external device before using your machine Canon cannot guarantee that all answering machines will be compatible with your machine due to varying specifications If you have connected an external device to your machine be sure to set the correct receive mode See Chapter 7 To connect an extension telephone as well as an answering machine connect the extension telephone to the answering machine and then the answering machine to your machine 1 If you connect a data modem to your machine and you use it extensively or others access your PC frequently through the data modem you may want a dedicated telephone line for your data modem Co oOo Co Machine d gt o gt a a c Q 7 Connecting the Telephone Line You need an RJ11 C or CA11A type modular wall jack to connect the machine to your telephone system This is a standard wall jack If you do not have this type of jack contact your local telephone company to have one installed Connect the machine to a telephone line as follows 1 Connect one end of the supplied telephone line to the jack marked on the left side of the machine 2 Connect the other end of the line to
94. 00 V 1 0 LSL Users A MIP A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Jams in the Output Slots Use this procedure if the recording paper jams or misfeeds in the output slots If this happens the message CLEAR PAPER JAM appears in the LCD display o fa 2 D Ej Co Frequently Asked 1 Gently pull any jammed paper out of the machine as shown below 2 Ifyou are using the multi purpose tray remove the paper stack from the multi purpose tray and reload it following the instructions in Loading Recording Paper on page 2 39 If the paper jam occurred while a fax was being received into the machine memory that fax will print automatically when the jam is cleared IN Note Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 7 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A a v ils Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Jams in the Paper Cassette If the recording paper jams or misfeeds while you are printing or copying check the following areas in the order described below Be sure to remove any documents or printed pages from the machine before removing the paper jam 1 Remove the extension tray 2 Remove the paper cassette 11 Be careful not to drop the cassette as you pull it out 3 If there is any jammed paper inside the machine gently pull it out of the machine being
95. 02 5 07 PM A a Problems Index E ge Problem See page 23 Paper e a aT E E E EEA 13 5 3 Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF ce eeeeeeteeeeee 13 5 Jams in the Output Slots 0 ccc ccecccscseeneteseeceeeseseecsneesesesnsneneneseees 13 7 Jams in the Paper Cassette c cccccccsscsesseseeseeceseseseecenesesesesneneneneees 13 8 Jams Inside the Machine cceccesceseesceseeseeceesceecaeeeeeeecaecaeeeeaeenees 13 10 Jams in the Front Area of the Machine cccesscesesceeeeeeeeeeenees 13 15 Jams in the Rear Cover of the Machine ccscceseseeeceeeeeeeeeees 13 18 After Clearing a Paper Jam c ceccccccccscesesceceneeseseensneeseeseneeseeeeney 13 20 Problems Feeding Paper into the Machine ccccccccccceseseeesesteteeees 13 21 Paper does not feed through the multi purpose tray 04 13 21 Printing is SkKeWed seserepan eee ee 13 21 Several sheets feed through the multi purpose tray at once 13 21 Transparencies do not feed correctly ccccccceseseseeteteeseeteteeeeeeees 13 22 The paper jams repeated ly ceccccccsseececetesesesteneeeseeeeteneseeeenes 13 22 Envelopes will not feed sssrinin ie ei 13 23 Faxing Problems Sending Faxes ccccsesesseseessesesesesceneesesesnsneeneses 13 24 Cannot Send a fax cccccecsccssssssesssssssssssesesesssssssesesesssssssesssesessseeees 13 24 Images on faxes received from the machine ALE SPOtted OF ditty
96. 1 5 times the cartridge life 600 x 600 dpi The machine scans documents at 400 x 300 dpi when using direct copying and at 200 x 300 dpi when using memory copying 100 90 80 70 e One copy only Approx 25 seconds First copy of multiple copies Approx 39 seconds e Subsequent copies Approx 10 seconds Up to 99 copies of a document A 6 Specifications Appendix HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L a a AY Is Ei Nip AIMS A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Telephone e Automatic FAX TEL switchover e Answering machine connection CNG detecting signal e Telephone connection e Handset connection e Remote reception by telephone Default reception ID 25 e Tone button e Pause button Appendix HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Specifications A 7 L a ao E S 2 ty Oo S a 7 Ei a AZ lls AS NB A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Printer Printing method Laser beam printing Printing resolution 600 x 600 dpi Paper handling Automatic feed Paper cassette capacity 250 sheets of letter or A4 20 lb or 75 g m Multi purpose tray e 100 sheets of letter legal A4 capacity 20 lb or 75 g m e 7 envelopes e 1 transparency e Label sheets up to 0 4 in 10 mm stack height Recording paper sizes Le
97. 1 Refer to Chapter 15 to learn how to change the settings of the machine LY Refer to Appendix for the machine technical specifications If you still have questions about how to use your machine contact your local authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer They will be happy to answer your questions Type Conventions Used in This User s Guide This user s guide follows the conventions below to emphasize certain information that will help you use your machine correctly and safely Cautions tell you how to avoid actions that could injure you or damage your machine Caution Ai Notes provide advice for using your machine more effectively describe operating restrictions and tell how to avoid minor operating difficulties Note In addition this user s guide uses bold letters to show the names of buttons and switches on the machine such as Stop Set and Start Copy Text that appears in the machine s display is shown in plain capital letters such as RECEPTION OK Chapter 1 Introducing the Machine 1 9 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae a o r a Introducing the VA US Ei AS A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM NB Customer Support Your machine is designed with the latest technology to provide trouble free operation The warranty information that is included with your machine describes Canon s limited warranty
98. 1100 book Page 20 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM After Clearing a Paper Jam After removing the jammed paper follow these steps 1 2 Install the FX3 cartridge back in the machine see page 2 33 Move the paper release lever back to its original position toward the front Close the front cover to reset the machine Load paper in the paper cassette or the multi purpose tray Note If you are experiencing repeated paper jams it may be due to the paper you are using e Tap the paper on a flat surface before stacking it in the paper cassette the multi purpose tray e Check that the paper you are using and your printing environment are within the specifications of the machine See Appendix Specifications Make sure you have removed any scraps of paper from inside the machine Not doing so will cause paper to jam again 13 20 Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 13 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L a m SZ Zs Ei Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 21 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Problems Feeding Paper into the Machine If you are having problems feeding paper into the machine check the following table Ai If you are using the multi purpose tray whenever you correct one of these problems be sure to remove the paper from the multi purpose tray Note and reload it See page 2 44 The following problems can also cause the
99. 15 4 lines mm Ultra High Quality Image Processing System UHQ Halftones 64 levels of gray 3 density adjustment levels Laser Beam printing Approx 6 pages minute Letter 8 5 x 11 in Legal 8 5 x 14 in A4 8 3 x 11 7 in Custom 8 5 x 12 5 in to 8 5 x 13 4 in Custom 8 5 x 10 0 in to 8 5 x 10 6 in Automatic dialing One Touch Speed Dialing 24 locations Coded Speed Dialing 100 locations Group Dialing 123 locations ao E S 2 ty Oo S a 7 Regular 10 button dialing with numeric buttons Automatic redialing including error redialing Manual redialing Pause button May occur to reduce stack of sheets or to enlarge the margins on a page Based on ITU T No 1 Chart A4 standard mode Appendix HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Specifications A 5 ae v US Ei Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Networking Report reference Toner saver Copier Resolution Default size Reduction sizes Copy speed Multiple copies e Delayed transmission up to 125 locations at a single pre set time e Sequential broadcast up to 125 locations e Automatic receiving e Non ring reception e Deactivate ECM e Activity report up to 20 transactions e Non delivery report e TTI Transmit Terminal Identification Economy mode for printing received faxes approximately
100. 2 5 07 PM Error Code 083 102 003 Cause You attempted to send a document or poll another machine with the incorrect subaddress and or password Face down delivery slot is full There is a paper jam The document is longer than 39 4 1 meter Action In either case if the error does not clear try disconnecting the power cord Wait five seconds then reconnect it If the message remains in the LCD contact your local authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer Contact the other party to check their settings Change your settings if necessary Take out sheets from delivery slot and clear the paper jam See page 13 5 Clear the paper jam then reload paper in the multi purpose tray See page 13 7 Use a copier to divide the document into smaller sections and send the copy Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae 13 41 xo o x e 22 ES 25 50 o WL Ei a 7 f Message ECM RX ECM TX LOAD PAPER A 1 1100 book Page 42 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Error Code Cause The machine is receiving a fax using ECM The machine is sending a fax using ECM The machine is out of recording paper Action If your local lines are in bad condition ECM receptions may take longer than normal reception Turn off ECM if you find reception speed extremely slow and need to
101. 2 50921 04 Canon CANADA 1 The name registered under that One Touch Speed Dialing button is displayed If no name is registered the number registered under that button will be displayed 1 If you mistakenly press the wrong One Touch Speed Dialing button press Stop then press the correct button 1 If no fax number is assigned to the One Touch Speed Dialing button you press the LCD displays NO TEL If this happens make sure you press the correct button and that the number you want to dial is registered under that button 5 10 Speed Dialing Chapter 5 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af E SZ mal A 1 1100 book Page 11 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E 3 Press Start Copy Start Copy 1 If you do not press Start Copy within five seconds of pressing the One Touch Speed Dialing button the machine will begin sending automatically If you do not want the machine to send automatically you need to change the TIME OUT setting See pages 15 7 and 15 8 for more details d Ifan error occurs during sending the machine will print an error report If this happens try sending the fax again See Faxing Problems on page 13 24 for details about errors Ai You can also use One Touch Speed Dialing to send a document to more LA than one location at a time For details see Group Dialing on page 5 Note 23 and Sequential Broadcasting on page 6 31 dD
102. 3 cartridge and load paper everything you need to know to get your machine ready to use LY Choosing a Location for Your Machine ccccceseeseteteseeeeseseeeens 2 3 DIMENSIONS 105 35 20c 5nsssaes chee esie cates aden espa E Ska E ELSES nen rba SPES SESSE ekoe Ep4 2 4 LY Unpacking Your Machine cccccccccecccceceseeneneesesesneneseseeeenesseeanans 2 5 Do You Have Everything ss erranari yirik OSESE 2 5 Lifting the Machine cccccccsesseesesceseseseeceneesesesesnenesesceeeneseeesnens 2 6 e Removing Shipping Materials cccscscsseseseesesetesceeeseseseenens 2 7 Replaceable Parts c ccccccccssesessesetescecesesesceneesesesnsneesesceeeneseseanens 2 9 LY Assembling the Machine ccccceccceeseeseeseneteseeceneteseecenenesesesnanenes 2 10 Attaching Components cccccccccsccescseseeneteesesssneesesceeenesesesnans 2 10 Attaching the Paper Loading Warning Label 008 2 10 Attaching the Extension Tray cccsscescseseseseenenesesesnenenes 2 11 Straightening the Multi Purpose Tray ccccccceeseeeeenees 2 11 Attaching the Support TrayS cccccseseeeceseseseseeneeseseanenenes 2 12 Attaching the Handset to Your Machine cceeeeees 2 13 Adjusting the Ringer and Speaker Volume Switches 2 16 Maintaining Your Handset ccccesesseceseeceseteseeeeneesesesneneees 2 16 TE Making Comme ctions cccccccccccsscseeceneesesnsneneeseeceseneseeseneess
103. 4 levels of gray rather than just two black and white This gives a much better reproduction of the photos though transmission time is longer 1 SUPER FINE resolution 203 x 391 dpi is for documents that contain fine print and images much smaller than the print in this sentence and its resolution is four times of FAX STANDARD Set the resolution as follows 1 Press Resolution Resolution FAX RES gt FAX STA 1 The LCD display shows the current resolution setting 2 Press Resolution until the resolution you want is displayed Resolution gt FAX RESOLUTION FAX STANDARD Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 13 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af E N o xs rs Da i lt j ne c O 72 a mal v ils A 1 1100 book Page 14 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o 3 Continue with the operation you wish to complete 1 If you do not proceed with any other operation the LCD display returns to standby mode after about 10 seconds 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD Setting the Scan Contrast Contrast is the difference in brightness between the lightest and darkest parts of a printed document You can adjust the contrast machine uses when scanning documents to be sent STANDARD is the default setting and is adequate for most documents To darken a light original set to DARKER to lighten dark originals use LIGHTER
104. 6 13 26 Frequently Asked Questions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Chapter 13 L a m SZ Zs Ei Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 27 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Receiving Faxes Problem The machine cannot receive faxes automatically The machine will not Possible cause The machine may not be set to receive automatically The machine may have a document in memory leaving very little or no memory available An error may have occurred during reception The paper cassette the multi purpose tray may be empty The telephone line may not be connected properly The machine may not be in xo Solution lt E 25 For the machine to receive S 3 faxes automatically it must 5O be in FAX ONLY MODE fra ANS MACHINE MODE or Fax Tel Mode See page 7 2 Print out any documents stored in memory See page 8 2 Check the LCD display for an error message See page 13 38 for a listing of the machine s error messages Print an activity report and look for an error code See page 12 2 Make sure the paper cassette the multi purpose tray has paper in it Make sure all telephone line connections are secure For the machine to switch switch between Fax Tel Mode automatically between telephone and fax calls telephone and fax calls it automatically must be in Fax Tel Mode See page 7 2 The machine may have a Print out an
105. 6 26 REDIALTIMES Selects the number of redial attempts ON OFF 2TIMES 1 to 10 REDIAL Selects the time interval between redial attempts 2 MIN 2 to 99 INTERVAL 4 TIME OUT Enables disables automatic scanning of documents after the ON fax number is entered OFF ON Scanning begins automatically five seconds after entering the fax number 10 seconds if sending to multiple fax numbers OFF Scanning does not start automatically You need to press Start Copy to begin scanning Default settings are shown in bold type 15 8 The Menu System HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Chapter 15 Ei o A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Accessing the RX SETTINGS Menu 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Data Pein REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGSTRATION 3 Press Set Set DATA REGSTRATION E gt 1 USER SETTINGS E A 4 Use A or V to select 4 RX SETTINGS 2 7 5 gt DATA REGSTRATION 7 4 RX SETTINGS 5 Press Set then use the A or V to display the item you want to set or change Chapter 15 The Menu System 15 9 an v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM RX SETTINGS For details on accessing the settings below see page 15 9 Setting Description Sub Settings 1 ECM RX Enables di
106. 7 PM A B 3 Gently insert the document face down top of the document first into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF until it stops The document is now ready for scanning Ai 1 Wait until your document has been scanned completely before starting a new job Note 1 The length of the document is slightly reduced when copying or sending documents using manual feed 1 When using manual document feed continuously each time set the document feed lever to manual document feed 6 12 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 13 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Setting the Resolution and Contrast Setting the Scanning Resolution Canon s Ultra High Quality UHQ imaging technology enables you to send faxes with a print quality that is very close to that of the original document The machine also lets you adjust the resolution it uses in sending faxes to best suit your particular document The machine has four resolution settings 1 FAX STANDARD resolution 203 x 98 dpi is adequate for most text documents 1 FAX FINE resolution 203 x 196 dpi is suitable for documents with fine print smaller than the print in this sentence I FAX PHOTO resolution 203 x 196 dpi with halftones is for documents that contain photographs With this setting areas of the document that contain photos are automatically scanned with 6
107. 7 PM A a 1 Memory e Windows 98 Me 32 megabytes MB of RAM 64 MB of RAM or more is recommended e Windows 2000 XP 64 MB of RAM 128 MB of RAM or more is recommended 1 Hard Disk Space 15 MB of available hard disk space 1 Disk Drive o r a Introducing the CD ROM drive or access to one over a network connection 1 Monitor 256 color SVGA monitor or greater 1 Printer Cable A USB cable 16 4 feet 5 meters in length or shorter Chapter 1 Introducing the Machine 1 7 a MIB Zils HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af AS NB A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Using Your Documentation Your machine includes the following documentation to help you learn how to use your machine quickly and easily 1 Quick Start Guide This guide provides basic information on how to set up and operate the machine 1 LASER CLASS 2050P User s Guide this guide This guide provides detailed information on how to set up operate maintain and troubleshoot your machine 1 Printer Driver Software User s Guide This guide is also stored on the CD ROM and describes how to use your machine to print from within your PC s Windows environment Refer to this guide whenever you need information about printing from your PC How to Use This User s Guide To make the best use of this user s guide in learning how to set up
108. 7 V AC three prong grounded outlet only Do not connect this machine to an outlet or power line shared with other appliances that cause electrical noise Air conditioners electric typewriters copiers and machines of this sort generate electrical noise which often interferes with communications equipment and the sending and receiving of documents Preface v m SZ Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af AS NB A 1 1100 book Page vi Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a CONNECTION OF THE EQUIPMENT This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the rear panel of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular jack are provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant See Installation instructions for details The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the numb
109. 8 CONNECTION TEL 1 213 978 3314 SUBADDRESS CONNECTION ID JOHN BARRISTER ST TIME 12 31 09 07 USAGE T 00 17 PGS 1 RESULT OK 2 2 2 l gc c 2 g e Q Q Chapter 12 Reports and Lists 12 7 v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Memory Clear Report If you experience a power failure all documents stored in memory can be saved for up to approximately 1 hour If power is not restored to the machine within 1 hour the documents in memory will be lost If this time limit has elapsed by the time power is restored to the machine as soon as power is restored a list of documents deleted from the memory as a result of the power failure is printed automatically 12 31 2002 10 32 FAX 8334423 WORLD ESTATE INC ld 001 MEMORY CLEAR REPORT MEMORY FILES DELETED TX RX NO MODE CONNECTION TEL ID PGS SET TIME ST TIME 0001 DELAYED TX 01 ADAM BOOKS CPA 1 12 30 10 07 23 30 0002 TRANSMIT 02 JOHN BARRISTER 3 12 30 10 26 If there are one or more documents in the image memory when the power LA is cut off the machine will print the Memory Clear Report when the Note power is restored unless the machine is running out of paper or toner 12 8 Reports and Lists Chapter 12 a cue HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s Guide ANS A 1 1100 book Page
110. 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o Speed Dialing Lists Your machine can print speed dialing lists These lists allow you to review the numbers and names registered under One Touch Speed Dialing buttons and Coded Speed Dialing codes including Group Dialing numbers Follow this procedure to print the lists 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Report 7 a REPORT 1 ACTIVITY REPORT 3 UsedAor V to select 2 SPEED DIAL LIST A V REPORT 2 SPEED DIAL LIST 4 Press Set Set lt lt SPEED DIAL LIST 1 1 TOUCH LIST 5 Use A or V to select the list you want to print and press Set A y Set Q aC 1 For lists other than Group Dialing continue on to step 6 n 2 a v c G n 2 d 2 o oc Chapter 12 Reports and Lists HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af 12 9 a v ils mal A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B 6 Use A or V to select YES or NO oS a OUTPUT 1 YES n OUTPUT 2 LQ NO The One Touch or Coded Speed Dial list is printed in order of the Speed Dial numeric list from the lowest number to the highest number 1 YES The CONNECTION ID name column is sorted and the One Touch or Coded Speed Dial list is printed in alphabetical order 7 Press Set os PRINTING REPORT 12 10 Reports and Lists Chapte
111. AUTO SW See page 7 8 Setting Up DRPD Mode Set the DRPD options as follows 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel and press Data Registration 5 PEOR FR ERY rnaT on 2 Press Set 5 PATAS BRCSERAT AQ 3 Use A or V to select 4 RX SETTINGS A oY bd TA Hit 4 Press Set then use A or V to select 2 RX MODE Set A y Sos AG 5 Press Set then use A or V to select DRPD Set A y RX MODE C gt CO CO DRPD 6 Press Set Set lt gt DRPD 1 NORMAL RING Chapter 7 Receiving Faxes 7 17 a MWB als HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 18 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 7 Use A or V to select a ring pattern A V DRPD a 1 NORMAL RING DRPD 2 DOUBLE RING DRPD 3 SHORT SHORT LONG DRPD 4 SHORT LONG SHORT DRPD 5 OTHER RING TYPE DRPD 6 FAX TEL AUTO SW 8 Press Set For this example we chose Normal Ring Set co NORMAL RING 1 UNIT TELEPHONE If you select the ring pattern 1 2 3 4 and 5 go to the next step If you select the ring pattern 6 go to step 18 9 Press Set again then use the numeric buttons to enter your telephone number NIT TELEPHONE EL 123 UNI TEL 4456 1 The number can be up to 20 digits long 1 Press Space to enter spaces between numbers spaces are optional and are ignored during dialing
112. CE DOWN DELIVERY FACE UP DELIVERY TONER CARTRIDGE PEE ee E RECORDING PAPER PAPER CASSETTE DOCUMENT RECORDING PAPER FACE DOWN MULTI PURPOSE TRAY DELIVERY TONER CARTRIDGE FACE UP DELIVERY A 4 6 Paper Handling Chapter 4 t Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM When you are printing follow these guidelines m m Always set the paper delivery selector before starting to print Do not switch the paper delivery selector until the printout comes out of the delivery slot completely Otherwise a paper jam may occur Make sure there is enough room for the paper to exit from the face up delivery slot Never pull the paper as it comes out of the machine When using face up delivery let the paper slide onto the extension tray When using face up delivery remove each sheet as it is delivered through the face up delivery slot When using the multi purpose tray be careful not to let any foreign object such as your necktie necklace hair etc enter into the feeder Chapter 4 Paper Handling 4 7 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L a Da c ne c r Q Q a Ei a AZ lls f A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Selecting Paper Delivery Received documents copies and prints can be deliver
113. D Ej Co Frequently Asked a AY lls Ei Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 36 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM General Problems Problem The machine has no power Possible cause The power cord may not be securely connected to the machine The power cord may not be supplying power Solution Make sure the power cord is connected securely to the machine and to a wall outlet If the power cord is connected to a power strip make sure the strip is connected to an outlet and turned on Check the power cord by substituting it with another or by using a voltmeter to test it for continuity Nothing appears in the LCD display The machine may not be receiving power Check the plug and be sure it is firmly connected to the power connector and the wall outlet If the display remains blank disconnecting the power cord wait five seconds then reconnect it If the display still remains blank contact your local authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer 13 36 Frequently Asked Questions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Chapter 13 Ei a m SZ Zs Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 37 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM If the Power Goes Out If power to the machine is cut off any documents stored in its memory will be retained for approximately one hour by a built in battery While power is out you can only use the mach
114. D DOCUMENT A V w SV RESEND DOCUMENT 3 Press Set Set 5 FEE gE poo 4 Use A or y toselect the TX RX number which you want to send A V G ees RESEND DOCUMENT NO 5003 TX RX 1 You can check the documents stored in memory by pressing lt or gt 5 Press Set Set lt a RESEND DOCUMENT SELECT LOCATIONS TEL If you registered a password to prevent unauthorized access to the polling box settings use the numeric buttons to enter it and then press Note Set IN 8 6 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o mi 6 Enter the destination s using any of the following three methods 1 One Touch Speed Dialing Press the desired One Touch Speed Dialing button s o xa 1 Coded Speed Dialing Press Coded Dial then enter the two digit code 00 99 using the numeric buttons o e Be sure to press Coded Dial before each code 1 Regular Dialing gt d 2 Eo Z2 oz G 0 for S D Enter the number using the numeric buttons and press Set or press Redial On 5 e You can only enter one number with the numeric buttons 7 When you finish entering numbers press Set to send the document Set Chapter 8 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af Using the Memory Features
115. E E 9 3 Requesting Another Machine to Send a Document cccecceseees 9 3 Canceling a Polling i iss esines ei paea Eben eA e tar KeA a ASERS REEERE Eia 9 5 Setting Up Polling Sendingiss sasoien e EEE E 9 6 Before You Can Be Polled to Send ccccceeccsceesceceescsseneneteseseeneneneeeeees 9 6 Setting Up a Poling BOX srs a e Eer Are eara 9 6 Scanning a Document into Memory for Polling Sending 9 9 Changing the Polling Box Setup ccccccscssssesescecesesesesteneeseseeneneneeees 9 11 Canceling a Polling BOXeer i aea an aaea aee roA Tna apan inaia nan 9 13 Chapter 10 Special Features iiep ea AREA E AE Epa 10 1 Special Diang Seroren ee e O A Sensi E ENEE 10 2 Dialing Through a Switchboard ss sssssssssrstsssserttssterstssssessesntsssseees 10 2 Long Distance Dialing imans yoia Ee a 10 3 How to Enter FaUSeS siisii ssessir nikiri inns 10 3 Using Tone Dialing On a Pulse Line s sn nssnssssssesesttsssestrtsessesstesseestes 10 4 Restricting Recepti isieni secina inesatte ino eieren roer iit ieina k 10 6 Chapter 11 Making Copies 00 0 0 cece cece eeeecececeseeeeecesecesssenesesesesesenesesesesesees 11 1 Makintg Copies ssics sstaccccsvsrasssseserstseneees tbe i e E a E e e i ate 11 2 Chapter 12 Reports and Lists cece cece ceceeeeeceseseseseeesesesesesenesenesesenens 12 1 Activity Report senri cctisces oxen tedis tes esee daeninsned ster sts otedvvera EE e a ein treie ia 12 2 Transmission TX Reports
116. E i J 14 2 ze 361 mm BOTTOM VIEW 30 773 mm j 483 mm 7 lan 6 06 Oe i f DE F I TS Le PS 2 55 ToO Lj LA If you need help installing your machine or have any questions about it contact your local authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer Note 2 4 Setting Up Your Machine HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Chapter 2 aa Ei SZ Zs A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A mi Unpacking Your Machine Follow the directions below to unpack your machine properly and to make sure you have all of its components and documentation Do You Have Everything As you unpack the machine save the carton and packing material in case you want to move or ship the machine in the future MET al tals Carefully remove all items from the box You should have someone help by holding the box while you lift the machine and its protective packaging out of the carton d ej e gt a a c Q 7 Make sure you have the following items wA RD EXTENSION TRAY SUPPORT TRAYS g X D FX3 CARTRIDGE HANDSET HANDSET CRADLE SCREWS WITH PLUGS POWER CORD WARRANTY TELEPHONE LINE CORD REGISTRATION CARD DOCUMENTATION FX3 CARTRIDGE WARRANTY PAPER LOADING WARNING LABEL SOFTWARE USER S CD ROM DESTINATION LABELS If any of the above items are damaged or missing notify your l
117. E setting Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 39 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae o fa 2 5 D Ej Co Frequently Asked Ei a t A 1 1100 book Page 40 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Message Error Code Cause CHECK POLLING ID 021 No subaddress and or password has been entered on your machine or the subaddress and or password do not match the settings on the other party s machine 008 No subaddress and or password has been entered on the other party s machine or the subaddress and or password do not match the settings on your machine CHECK PRINTER The toner cartridge in the machine is defective The machine is connected to an uninterruptible power supply UPS Action Make sure the subaddress and or password match the settings on the other party s machine See pages 5 5 and 5 14 Contact the other party to enter the correct subaddress and or password Reinstall the cartridge See page 2 33 If the message remains in the LCD replace the toner cartridge See page 2 33 Make sure the power cord is connected to an AC outlet 13 40 Frequently Asked Questions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Chapter 13 L a Ei 7 9 Message CHECK PRINTER continued CHK SUBADDR PSWD CLEAR PAPER JAM DOC TOO LONG A 1 1100 book Page 41 Friday December 13 200
118. EPORT SETTINGS Menu 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGSTRATION 3 Press Set Set DATA REGSTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS F S 4 Use Aor V to select 2 REPORT SETTINGS 3 oo DATA REGSTRATION 2 2 REPORT SETTINGS 2 5 Press Set then use the A or V to display the item you want to set or change Chapter 15 The Menu System 15 5 an v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM REPORT SETTINGS For details on accessing the settings below see page 15 5 Setting Description Sub Settings 1 TX REPORT Enables disables automatic printing of a TX transmission PRINT ERROR ONLY REPORT See page 12 4 OUTPUT YES OUTPUT NO PRINT ERROR ONLY Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs OUTPUT YES Prints a report every time you send a document OUTPUT NO No report is printed PRINT WITH If you select PRINT ERROR ONLY or OUTPUT YES above ON IMAGE this setting enables disables printing of the first page of the fax OFF under the report 2 RX REPORT Enables disables automatic printing of an RX reception OUTPUT NO REPORT See page 12 7 PRINT ERROR ONLY OUTPUT NO No report is printed OQUTRUTYES PRINT ERROR ONLY Prints a report only when a reception error occurs OUTPUT YES Prints a report every
119. ES UNNGA EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN E Bo coOn onmcis eal 9 AA MBENTUET LaF eb SnMESCLT CRA RS5 8169 xii Preface HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af t mal MIP Zs ZIN T 1100 book Page xiii Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM a Contents Chapter1 Introducing the Machine ss senssssssssisssssesssestsstessesnsstentessnsnestentesensseseesee 1 1 WelecOMe is erene ara REA E E E a EEA covets EESE 1 2 The Main Features of the Machine cccccccsessesescseeseseseeteneneesesteneeneeeees 1 3 Plain Paper Fax Features ccccccscsesseseseeceseseseecesesescsneneeseseseeeneseeeees 1 3 Printer Features cccccccsesececescsesetesesescseseseesescseseesenesesesseseessseeeeneees 1 4 Copier Features ia scien ned soi ented E TE eek ots 1 5 Telephone Feature ko nira a a Saa oaee tean ERR Ra an TES TSS 1 5 Using the Machine With the Printer Driver teteeseeteteseeees 1 6 System RequireMents cceccccccsescsesseneeseseeceneesceceesesssnanseneseseeneneeeseeees 1 6 Using Your Documentation cccccccecceeiieneieceeneeneieneseeeeeteseeeeeees 1 8 How to Use This User s Guide ccccccesesessssescssecesessstsneneeseseeeneneeeees 1 8 Type Conventions Used in This User s Guide cece 1 9 Customer SUpport ise hice si anar ap aa aiK AEE EE RAAEN EE dats 1 10 Safety Instr ctionS ssie Snine a EEE ie 1 11 Chapter2 Setting Up Your Machine ss sess
120. HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L a m SZ Zs Ei Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Chapter 3 Registering Information in the Machine This chapter describes how to enter information in your machine d Guidelines for Entering Information s sssssssssrsssssesrtssssestessserstsse 3 2 e Entering Numbers Letters and SymDoIs ccccccceeeeseseees 3 2 Editing Information ccccccccsseesesesneteseeceseneseeseneesesesneenes 3 4 e Using the One Touch Speed Dialing Button One Touch Speed Dialing Panel ccccceceseseteieseeeeteseseeeens 3 5 e Using the Special Function Buttons ccccccccsseseseteeeeeeeseseseens 3 5 2 Using the Menu System act oee ttre cesta tate et tue eats 3 6 Dey d Personalizing Your Machine s sssssssssssssstsseserstsrteestesstesnsestesssesessse 3 8 38 F Identifying Your Documents sssssessssesesttssterstrtiestesrtesseestessneen 3 8 E Entering the Date and Time ccccccccesseseetetesesesteteesceeeseseseenens 3 9 e Registering Your Fax Number and Name ccccsesccececccceseseseees 3 10 Setting the Telephone Line TyPe ccccccceeseesesteteteseeceseseseseens 3 12 Setting Daylight Saving Time ccc ceeseesesesteteeeceeeteseseenens 3 13 Chapter 3 Registering Information in the Machine 3 1 a v US HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af
121. If you select CUSTOM here you can select A4 from CUSTOM1 LONG and CUSTOM2 SHORT CUSTOM1 LONG CUSTOM2 SHORT 3 ECONOMY PRT _ Enables disables economy printing OFF ON 4 TONER SUPPLY Selects whether the machine continues printing when RX TO MEMORY LOW toner level is low CHANGE CARTRIDGE displayed in the KEEP PRINTING LCD RX TO MEMORY Stops printing and received documents are stored in memory KEEP PRINTING Continues printing even when toner level is low Select this setting when you do not have a new toner cartridge available and need to print any documents received in memory Default settings are shown in bold type 15 12 The Menu System Chapter 15 o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users ae f A 1 1100 book Page 13 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM E Accessing the POLLING BOX Menu 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Data Registration 3 Press Set Set lt D 4 Use A or V to select 6 POLLING BOX A v CO REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGSTRATION DATA REGSTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS S S n gt S DATA REGSTRATION z 6 POLLING BOX 2 5 Press Set then use the A or V to display the item you want to set or change Chapter 15 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af The Menu System 15 13 mal a v ils A 1 1100 book Page 14 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM POLLING
122. M 9 Changing the Polling Box Setup Follow this procedure to change the setup of a polling box 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Registration REGISTRATION Co 1 DATA REGSTRATION 3 Press Set DATA REGSTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS 4 Use A or Vy to select 6 POLLING BOX A V DATA REGSTRATION D 6 POLLING BOX 5 Press Set POLLING BOX 1 SETUP FILE 6 Use A or y to select 2 CHANGE DATA A V POLLING BOX eS 2 CHANGE DATA If you have not set the operation password please skip the next step 7 Press Set then enter the four digit password using the numeric buttons Set vO gt r DATA RD n gt nm Q om Chapter 9 Setting Up and Using Polling 9 11 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af E ke te SE 25 2e e2 2 So oO no a MIP mal A 1 1100 book Page 12 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B 8 Press Set Set 9 Use A or y to display the item you want to change A v CO 10 Press Set then change the setting Set Follow the same procedures you used to set up the polling box 11 Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD 9 12 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 9 e HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 13 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 P
123. M A E Canceling a Polling Box Follow this procedure to cancel a polling box Ai You cannot cancel a polling box when the polling box is holding a document for polling sending Note 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration a Reolatrtin REGISTRATION S 1 DATA REGSTRATION Dp c 3 3 Press Set o gt gt DATA REGSTRATION 1 USER SETTINGS 4 Use A or V to select 6 POLLING BOX A y DATA REGSTRATION E 8 POLLING BOX 5 Press Set 2 POLLING BOX 1 SETUP FILE 6 Use A or y to select 3 DELETE FILE AV POLLING BOX aioe 3 DELETE FILE If you have not set the operation password please skip the next step Chapter 9 Setting Up and Using Polling 9 13 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 14 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B 7 Press Set then enter the four digit password using the numeric buttons DELETE FILE PASSWORD z 8 Press Set eS DATA REGSTRATION 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS 9 Press Stop to return to standby mode a 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD Chapter 9 9 14 Setting Up and Using Polling e HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A NZ GINS ps 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Chapter 10 Special Features This chapter describes the special feature
124. O To allow reception only when the caller gives its telephone numbers 10 Press Set then press Stop to return to standby mode Stop os 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTe STANDARD no o 3 G o ne 8 oO Q Q o Chapter 10 Special Features 10 7 a F v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a 10 8 Special Features Chapter 10 HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af a AY Zs Nip AIMS A 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Chapter 11 Making Copies This chapter describes how to make copies with your machine H Making Copies 3sc scfiscnin ties atain Morden diet he den ete ies 11 2 o 2 2 8 dD x Chapter 11 Making Copies 11 1 a v US HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Making Copies One of the machine s convenient features is its ability to make up to 99 high quality copies of a document To make copies do the following Ai Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document See page 6 6 for details Note 1 Prepare the document and load it face down into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 11 Once the document is loaded the LCD display shows the fo
125. OLE DORSET BH25 8ER TELEPHONE BOOLE 945 13 51617 FAX 123456 PAGE OF THE DOCUMENT Our Ref 350 P C EAC 27 December 2002 Dr P N Cundall Mining Surveys Ltd A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM ST TIME USAGE T Holroyd Road Reading Berks Represents the time the last attempt was made to transmit a document Represents the amount of time it took during the last attempt to transmit Please note that the usage time does not reflect the total usage time used to transmit all pages of the document when retry occurs By printing an ACTIVITY REPORT and matching the transaction number of the TX REPORT with a transaction number in the ACTIVITY REPORT you can find out exactly how many attempts were made to send the document how many pages were sent in each attempt as well as the usage time for each attempt n 2 a v c G n 2 d 2 o a Chapter 12 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s Guide lis Reports and Lists 12 5 A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 PGS SENT When OK appears under RESULT see below PGS SENT represents the number of pages that were successfully transmitted when an error did not occur in the first attempt or in consequent retries When NG appears under RESULT see below PGS SENT indicates the pages after this page were not sent RESULT OK means that all pa
126. SS 5 14 Speed Dialing Chapter 5 eo HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 15 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B The TX TYPE menu includes these items REGULAR TX Designates the transaction as a normal transmission with no special features You can cancel the currently set PSWD SUB ADDRESS by selecting REGULAR TX PSWD SUBADDRESS Allows you to enter an ITU T password or subaddress for the transmission 1 SUBADDRESS The ITU T subaddress for the transmission 2 PASSWORD The ITU T password for the transmission 16 Press Set to store TX TYPE If you select REGULAR TX it goes back to CODED SPEED DIAL If you want to register another Coded Speed Dialing button repeat the procedure from step 7 To return to standby mode press Stop Set To perform PSWD SUBADDRESS settings 17 Press Set then use the numeric buttons to enter a subaddress SUBADDRESS 1234 18 Press Set to store a subaddress Set lt gt PSWD SUBADDRESS 2 PASSWORD 2 S 19 Press Set then use the numeric buttons to enter a password Set b lt D PASSWORD Q 1234 n Chapter 5 Speed Dialing 5 15 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 16 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B 20 Press Set to store a password oS CODED SPEED DIAL 05 21 To continue registering numbers names an
127. See page 8 2 NO RX PAPER 012 The other party s Contact the other machine is out of party and have them paper and its add paper to their memory is full machine NO TEL 022 The One Touch or Register the number Coded Speed See Dialing number has Chapter 5 not been registered NOT AVAILABLE You entered an Enter a valid invalid number number Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 43 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae o fa 2 5 D Ej Co Frequently Asked Ei a t f A 1 1100 book Page 44 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Message Error Code PSWD POLL REJECT 084 PSWD TX REJECTED 081 REC D IN MEMORY SELECT POL REJCT 082 Cause You attempted to poll a machine with a password but the other party has not set a password or their fax machine does not support polling with a password You attempted to send a document with a password but the other party s machine does not support reception with a password The paper or toner ran out or a paper jam occurred so the machine received the document in memory You attempted to poll a machine with a subaddress but the other party has not set a subaddress or their machine does not support polling with a subaddress Action Contact the other party to check their settings If their machine does not support polling with a password delete the password you have registered See p
128. TE CAUSES UNIQUEMENT ET DIRECTEMENT PAR LA NEGLIGENCE DE CANON OU DE TOUT D TAILLANT LA PRESENTE GARANTIE N EST PAS ACCORDEE A D AUTRES PERSONNES QUE L ACHETEUR INITIAL DE LA CARTOUCHE A La pr sente garantie restreinte vous accorde des droits particuliers reconnus par la loi et il se peut que vous disposiez d autres droits qui peuvent varier d un Etat ou d une province l autre LA PRESENTE GARANTIE S APPLIQUE AUX CARTOUCHES VENDUES ET UTILIS ES AUX TATS UNIS ET AU CANADA SEULEMENT Tel que pr cis dans le manuel d utilisation du Produit Au Canada CANON U S A INC CANON CANADA INC One Canon Plaza 6390 DIXIE ROAD Lake Success New York 11042 1198 MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO LST 1P7 Canada HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s Guide
129. UBADDRESS 1234 PSWD SUBADDRESS 2 PASSWORD Press Set then use the numeric buttons to enter a password PASSWORD 1234 18 Press Set to store a password 5 ka SPD DIAL 05 19 To continue registering numbers names and TX type repeat steps 5 to 18 Or If you have finished registering numbers names and TX type press Stop to return to standby mode Stop 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD 5 6 Speed Dialing Chapter 5 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B 20 After you register a number for One Touch Speed Dialing write the name of the other party on a destination label and stick it on the One Touch Speed Dialing panel above the number of the One Touch Speed Dialing button where the number is registered Changing a Number Name Stored Under a One Touch Speed Dialing Button Follow these steps if you want to change a number and or name registered under a One Touch Speed Dialing button or if you want to delete all information stored under a button 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Fegan REGISTRATION CO 1 DATA REGSTRATION 3 Use A or V to select 2 TEL REGISTRATION A Vv REGISTRATION e 2 TEL REGISTRATION 4 Press Set twice Set Set TEL REGISTRATION gt 1 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL M 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL T 01 905 795 1111 a TS oO 2 7 5 U
130. User s af N o xs rs Da i lt j ne c O 72 mal a v ils f A 1 1100 book Page 28 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 3 To cancel the redialing press 1 The machine beeps and alternates the following displays Tone 02 TUE 10 00 0001 TUE 10 00 LLE 1 The machine then prints an error report if set to print one PRINTING REPORT Ai 1 Automatic redialing cannot be canceled by pressing Stop while the machine is waiting to redial If you press Stop while the machine is Note waiting to redial the LCD displays the standby mode but remains in automatic redialing mode 1 You can also delete the document from memory See Deleting a Document Stored in Memory on page 8 8 Setting Up Automatic Redialing You can set up the following options for automatic redialing 4 The number of times machine attempts redialing 1 The time interval between redialing attempts 6 28 Sending Faxes HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af Chapter 6 7 mal a MIP 9 A 1 1100 book Page 29 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Follow the procedure below to adjust the automatic redialing settings 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Data Registration 3 Press Set then press A or V to select 3 TX SETTINGS Set A y Co CO CO 4 Press Set then p
131. You Use Polling Receiving ccccccecscseteeseeeeseseseseens 9 2 LY Polling to Receive Faxes ssie i ii erna ikee 9 3 e Requesting Another Machine to Send a Document ses s 9 3 Canceling a Polling den eiai eei aie ar aaaea aa E ia 9 5 d Setting Up Polling Sending sn sssssessssssestisesettsntsestesntesnsentessserntsss 9 6 e Before You Can Be Polled to Send n s nssnnsssssnsssstsrtsessesrtnsssestesseens 9 6 Setting Up a Polling BOX ccecccecsccessseecenenesesessetenesesceeeesesesnens 9 6 e Scanning a Document into Memory for Polling Sending 9 9 e Changing the Polling Box Setup ccceccsceseesesteteeseeeeneseseeeens 9 11 Canceling a Polling BOX c cccsccecescecesesescenetesesesssneeseeceeeneseseenens 9 13 Chapter 9 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Setting Up and Using Polling 9 1 o a xe fo SE pE 22 ao 2 So 0 n aa AY lls Ei AS NB A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a What is Polling Polling means a fax calls another machine and requests that the other machine send a document that it is holding Unlike normal sending and receiving in polling the receiver always calls the sender This is called polling to receive a document The sender sends the document in response to the polling by a telephone call from the receiver Ai Your machine can be set up to function in both roles Your m
132. ace and steady it with one hand Remove the seal by gently pulling on the plastic tab with your other hand 1 Use a firm even pull to remove the plastic seal To avoid breaking the seal do not jerk on it unevenly SIDE VIEW T PULL IN THIS DIRECTION TOP VIEW p i 5 I AN PULL IN THIS DIRECTION 2 36 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A f A 1 1100 book Page 37 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 8 Insert the toner cartridge into the machine 1 Align the tabs on the left and right sides of the cartridge with the rails inside the machine 1 Slide the cartridge into position LY Always hold the cartridge by its handle when inserting it in the machine HANDLE 9 Gently press the cartridge into the machine as far as it will go 1 Press down and back on the cartridge s handle Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 37 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mi MET al tals d J o gt a a c Q 7 a MIP mal AS A 1 1100 book Page 38 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM NB 10 Close the front cover 1 Use both hands to lift the cover back to its closed position 2 38 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 o a AY Z
133. achine N Note Whenever you plan to transport the machine you need to prepare it so it will not be damaged during the move 1 2 3 10 11 Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet Remove any paper and or documents from the machine Open the front cover by lifting the right side release latch of the machine and remove the toner cartridge 1 Store the toner cartridge in its original protective bag or wrap it in a thick cloth to avoid exposure to light Use both hands to close the front cover until it clicks into position Disconnect the handset telephone or answering machine if you have connected one to the machine Disconnect the telephone line cord from the machine Disconnect the power cord from the machine Hold the flap of the paper rest down and press the paper rest downward Remove the support trays and extension tray from the machine See Attaching Components on page 2 10 Replace all tapes and shipping materials you removed when you first unpacked the machine See Removing Shipping Materials on page 2 7 Pack the machine and all its components into its original shipping carton Use the illustration on page 2 5 for reference If you no longer have the shipping carton your machine came in pack the machine in a suitably sized sturdy cardboard box using bubble wrap foam peanuts or other suitable packing materials Chapter 14 Maintaining Your Machine 14 9
134. achine can LA poll to receive a document or it can be polled to send a document that it Note is holding Before You Use Polling Receiving Before you try to set up polling note the following points I With one operation you can poll several machines You can dial up to 125 telephone numbers and poll those machines to receive documents that they are holding m You can poll a document at any time but you may find it more useful to set your machine for polling other machines at specified times throughout the day 1 You must know if the other machine is holding the document under both a subaddress and password or only a subaddress or password You must also know the subaddress and password so you can enter them on your machine If you do not know the subaddress or password contact the other party 1 Ifthe other party s documents are registered for polling without a subaddress or password you can still perform polling receiving 1 If the other party s machine does not support ITU T subaddress password transactions you can ask them to set the polling ID to 255 or 11111111 binary when the other party s machine is a Canon fax 9 2 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 9 a AY Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af f o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Polling to Receive Faxes The machine pollin
135. age See pages 5 5 and 5 14 Contact the other party to check their settings If their machine does not support reception with a password delete the password you have registered See pages 5 5 and 5 14 Add paper to the paper cassette or the multi purpose tray with set up paper size change the toner cartridge or clear the paper jam Contact the other party to check their settings If their machine does not support polling with a subaddress delete the subaddress you have registered See pages 5 5 and 5 14 13 44 Frequently Asked Questions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Chapter 13 L a Ei 9 A 1 1100 book Page 45 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Message SUBADD TX REJECT TX RX CANCELLED TX RX NO nnnn TX RX NO nnnn Error Code Cause You attempted to send a document with a subaddress but the other party s machine does not support reception with a subaddress You pressed Stop to cancel the transmission When the machine sends or receives a fax it assigns a unique identification number to it The machine is Action Contact the other party to check their settings If their machine does not support reception with a subaddress delete the subaddress you have registered See pages 5 5 and 5 14 Write the number down if you will need it later You can also print an activity report after the transmission to chec
136. and 45 seconds Set F T RING TIME 15SEC 1 This setting determines how many seconds the machine rings while waiting for someone to pick up the handset 10 Press Set Set lt D 11 Press Set again then use A or y to select RECEIVE or DISCONNECT Set A y co CO CO disconnect the call 12 Press Set Set lt D 13 Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop DEFAULT ACTION RECEIVE DEFAULT ACTION DISCONNECT 1 This setting tells the machine what to do if no one picks up the handset within the specified ring time set in step 9 LJ Select RECEIVE to receive the call and DISCONNECT to Chapter 7 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af Receiving Faxes 7 9 o x in dD 2 D D as an mal MIP A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Receiving Faxes Manually MANUAL MODE To use this mode you must have the handset or a telephone connected to the machine See Attaching the Handset to Your Machine on page 2 13 In MANUAL MODE the machine rings every time it receives a call whether the call is from a telephone or a fax machine Make sure the REMOTE RX setting in the RX SETTINGS menu is enabled See pages 15 9 and 15 10 for details N Note If you use your machine with MANUAL MODE answer incoming calls as follows 1 When the handset
137. and feed it into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF again Check the content of the One Touch or Coded Speed Dialing button and make sure it was registered correctly See Chapter 5 Call the other party and make sure they have paper in their fax machine 13 24 Frequently Asked Questions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s A Chapter 13 L a m SZ Zs Ei A 1 1100 book Page 25 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Nip AS Problem Possible cause Solution Cannot send a fax The machine may be sending Allow time for the current continued another document from document to finish sending memory An error may have occurred during sending There may be a problem with the telephone line The receiving machine may not be a G3 machine Print an activity report and check for an error code See page 12 2 Make sure you have a dial tone on the handset or telephone If not contact your local telephone company Make sure the receiving machine is compatible with the machine which is a G3 machine Ai If none of the above solve the problem try disconnecting the power cord for at least five seconds then reconnecting it If the problem persists Note contact your local authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer Please note that any documents stored in memory will be erased unless you reconnect it within 1 hour Images on faxes received The receiving machine
138. aper 2 23 H Handset jack 2 25 sending with 6 15 Hook button explanation 2 27 Humidity 2 3 INCOMING RING setting 15 10 J Jack answering machine 2 18 2 25 extension telephone 2 18 handset 2 25 telephone line 2 17 2 25 Jams after clearing 13 20 in Automatic Document Feeder ADF 13 5 in front area 13 15 in output slots 13 7 inside machine 13 10 paper 13 5 I 4 Index HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Ei AY Zs A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM SA ZIN K recording paper 2 39 4 12 Location choosing 2 3 dimensions 2 4 Long distance L dialing 10 3 KEYPAD VOLUME setting 15 4 Label M paper loading 2 5 2 10 babies Machine EE gt assembling 2 10 using 410 cleaning 14 2 Lateh components 2 5 2 23 release aoa dimensions 2 4 LCD Gisplay front view 2 23 explanation 2 27 inside view 2 24 Letters er lifting 2 6 entering 7 main features 1 3 lowercase S maintenance 14 1 uppercase 27 paper path 4 6 Lever personalising 3 8 document feed 6 6 rear view 2 25 paper release 2 24 13 11 13 20 serialnumber 13 2 Lifting E testing 2 46 sername transporting 14 9 LINE MONITOR VOL setting 15 4 unpacking 2 5 List l user s guide 1 8 2 5 coded speed dial 12 9 12 12 12 13 Mai aintenance See Chapter 14 documents in memory 8 2 Manual group dial 12 9 12 13 redialing 6 26 ene tone speed dial Meese sending via the handset 6
139. ation at a time When the set time comes machine dials and sends the document N o xs rs Da i lt j ne c O 72 Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 35 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 36 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Sending Other Documents While the Machine is Set for Delayed Sending The machine is a multitasking unit so you can send receive print and copy other documents even when you have set machine for delayed sending To print copy or send other documents after setting machine for delayed sending simply follow the procedures described in this user s guide 6 36 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 e SZ Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Chapter 7 Receiving Faxes This chapter describes how to use your machine to receive documents d Different Ways to Receive a Fax cccccccccscseseteseeceeeseseeseneeseseeeeenes 7 2 FAX TELAUTO SW ciere upna ied 7 2 FAX ONLY MODE iee ee ia aas eeraa e rasan ne KARARKA AREKE 7 2 DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection 0 eee 7 2 Setting the RX MODE ccccccccesescecessseseeneesesesssnesesesceeeesesesnans 7 4 Setting the Receive MOde cecccccccesseseeteteesesnsneteesceeenesssesens 7 5 e Receiving Faxes and Telephone Calls Automatically Bax Tel MOG eC
140. ber machine 13 2 Setting contrast 6 13 6 14 copying resolution 11 2 scanning resolution 6 13 telephone line type 3 12 Shipping materials removing 2 7 Size document 6 3 paper 4 2 Special function buttons 2 29 button 2 30 Clear button 2 30 Cursor buttons 2 30 Data Registration button 2 29 Index HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae I 9 aa MWB Zils mal KA Zs A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Delayed Transmission button 2 29 Memory Reference button 2 29 Polling button 2 29 Report button 2 29 Search buttons 2 30 Space button 2 30 Tone button 2 30 using 3 5 Speed copying 1 5 transmission 1 4 Speed dialing coded 5 2 5 12 group dialing 5 2 5 23 list 12 8 methods 5 2 Start Copy button explanation 2 27 Stop button explanation 2 27 Support trays 2 5 2 23 attaching 2 12 Switchboard dialing through 10 2 SYSTEM SETTINGS menu accessing 15 15 description 3 6 setting 15 16 T TEL LINE TYPE setting 15 4 TEL REGISTRATION menu description 3 6 Telephone line 2 5 connecting 2 17 jack 2 25 setting type 3 12 Temperature 1 12 2 3 Testing machine 2 46 Time entering 3 9 Tone using on a pulse line 10 4 Tone button explanation 2 27 Tone button using 10 4 Toner cartridge 2 5 compartment 2 24 handling 2 31 installing 2 33 replacing 2 33 storing 2 31 TONER SUPPLY LOW setting 15 12 Touch tone setting 3 12 using on a pulse line 10 4
141. careful not to tear it 13 8 Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 13 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s A L a m SZ Zs Ei A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A mi 4 Remove the stack of paper from the cassette and do the following a Fan the stack of paper and tap it on a flat surface to even out the stack b Reinsert the stack of paper into the cassette Make sure all corners and edges are flat and even and that the stack is not higher than the limit marks vv y o fa 2 D Ej o Frequently Asked Pa MN V PAPER SELECTOR LIMIT MARK 5 Replace the paper cassette and the extension tray Ai 1 Ifthe paper cassette sticks when you try inserting it in the machine LA remove it from the machine and open the front cover Then close it Note and try reinserting the paper cassette If the paper jam occurred while receiving a document the remainder of the document is received in memory Once the paper jam is cleared the document in memory will print automatically 1 Ifthe error message remains displayed there may be more jammed paper in other areas Check the other areas as described on the following pages 1 If you have difficulty inserting the paper cassette after removing it completely disconnect then connect the power cord When the PLEASE WAIT message is no longer disp
142. cations A 13 a v US KA Zs A 1 1100 book Page 14 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A 14 Specifications Appendix e SZ TUS HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Glossary A AC Alternating current The type of electrical current available from a wall outlet Activity report A journal of the machine s fax transactions both sent and received Application program Software prepared for a specific function or set of functions Developers who make application programs include drivers that support different types of printers ASCII Acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange A set of definitions for the bit composition of characters and symbols ASCII defines 128 symbols using 7 binary bits and 1 parity bit Auto FAX TEL switching See FAX TEL switching Automatic dialing Dialing fax or telephone numbers by pressing one or three buttons To use automatic dialing you must register the numbers in the machine s memory See also One Touch Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing and Group Dialing Automatic Document Feeder ADF The device included in the machine that feeds the document being faxed copied or scanned into the machine gt i f o o a So Automatic image reduction The machine can print the date time company name and a fax number
143. cceseseseeneesesesssneneesceeeneseseenans 5 2 One Touch Speed Dialing cccececcccccccesceseeneteesestsnenesesceeesesssesnans 5 3 e Storing Numbers for One Touch Speed Dialing ccee 5 3 e Changing a Number Name Stored Under a One Touch Speed Dialing Butt n sssi e ae cele a a a SERDAR 5 7 e Using One Touch Speed Dialing cccceescseseteeeeceteseseseens 5 10 Coded Speed Dialing 3 ccccicacisscediesitanesctacabeastes tacuesedsteeaacenetanss 5 12 e Storing Numbers for Coded Speed Dialing cccccceseseees 5 12 e Changing a Number Name Stored under a Coded Speed Dialing Code nreo is aa aore SARER 5 17 e Using Coded Speed Dialing cccccccceesssssteseststeteescesenesesesens 5 21 Group Dialin orinn eia O E EE E 5 23 e Creating Groups for Group Dialing ses sssssssssrtsessssttssssrstesstees 5 23 Using Group Dialing ipi ieies seee rerekee Aiea AERES REE RESSE 5 27 Chapter 5 Speed Dialing 5 1 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae o a dD S m ke 2 7 m v US Ei Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A F T Speed Dialing Methods In addition to regular dialing the machine provides several ways to dial fax telephone numbers automatically 1 One Touch Speed Dialing Dial a fax telephone number by pressing the One Touch Speed Dialing button that the number is assigned to 11 Coded Sp
144. ceeccscesesceceesesesteneeseseeneeneeees 2 17 Connecting an Extension Telephone or Answering Machine 2 18 Connecting the Power Cord ccccsccesesescecssesescenesesssesnsneneseseeneesesees 2 19 Connecting the Machine to Your PC cceccccccetecsesteneteeseeneeneeees 2 22 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine cccccccsseeseseeneteeseeteteneeees 2 23 Contents xiii g HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users Guide ah NZ Zs ZI LIT00 book Page xiv Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM a FEONENVIEW mieia e a ie AK AEEA E AE RE ORE E sevens okgatbeee eas 2 23 Inside ViGW ssie reenen eni E EAEE E EE 2 24 Rear VIEW Aree E O A A AR i iai 2 25 The Operation Patel sesh aa a test 2 26 Special Function Buttons One Touch Speed Dialing Panel Open ccccccecceeseeeens 2 29 The Toner Cartridge nenene oae e AE Ea EE AA E E SEa 2 31 Handling and Storing Cartridges ccccccescscecetesesesteneeseseeneeneeees 2 31 Installing Replacing the Toner Cartridge cccccccecesesteteteeeeeteteeees 2 33 Loading Recording Papetes eri n Eea A eaa 2 39 Loading Paper in the Cassette ccccccssesecesetesssesnsteneeseseeeseeees 2 41 Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ccseeseesetesees 2 44 Testing the Machine phinsean ontarte tare AE eA eiae EE E ani 2 46 Chapter3 Registering Information in the Machine 0 0 ccce sees seeeeeees 3 1 Guidelines for Entering Information cccccccecceceeest
145. cssesesesesteteteeseeneeseeeeees 13 32 MEMORY FULL appears in the LCD display when you are making multiple COpies cccccssssssseseseetesseseseseeeseesees 13 32 Printing Problems eieiei ia a eeose s Enie ea PEPE ELAES 13 33 The Alarm lamp comes on and the machine beeps while printing sssessessssessesssssessissesrertessesnesnsnresseseesnes 13 33 Nothing prints ci citiee situa a E E a E 13 33 Printout does not match paper size ssssssssessssssesiesiesesseseesteseess 13 34 The printout Curls enaa Era na i 13 34 Thepaperjams sigidi anaana EEr EE AEAEE a 13 34 Print Quality Problems eeiisen giiia ieser psani tne iE is Pie ES EiS 13 35 Printis NOt Cleat anisina a n dened 13 35 The printout has vertical white streaks 0 0 0 sees ee eseeeeeees 13 35 General Problem cect cseeececcsesseessescsneneecsnesessssnssenscseesenenen 13 36 The machine has NO power eseseeceesesceseseseeceesesesnsnseneseeeeseeseeeenes 13 36 Nothing appears in the LCD display cccccsesesseteeseeteteseeeeees 13 36 13 4 Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 13 aa HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users Guide ah A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A mi Paper Jams On occasion the document feeding into the machine Automatic Document Feeder ADF or the paper in the paper cassette the multi purpose tray may misfeed or jam If this happens you can usually fix the problem using one of the f
146. ctive in areas where the telephone lines are in poor condition or there is frequent interference on the line Do not use ECM if you need to send a document quickly and you are sure the other party can read your transmission without it turning off ECM also turns off MMR Extension A telephone connected to the machine that is used in place of the handset You can use the extension telephone to activate incoming reception of documents manually Glossary G3 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae gt i f o o 2 0 VA US Ei AS NB A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a F FAX TEL switching This option allows you to set the machine to automatically detect whether a call is from a fax or telephone If the call is from another machine the transmission is automatically received If the call is from a telephone the machine rings to let you know so you can pick up the handset With this feature one telephone line can be shared by both the telephone and the fax FINE The resolution setting for documents with very small characters and lines G G3 Group 3 fax machine Defined by ITU T Uses encoding schemes to transmit image data while reducing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted thus reducing transmission time G3 fax machines can transmit one page in less than one minute Encoding schemes for G3 fax machines are Mod
147. cument easily and quickly This method of sending scans the document into memory and as the first page of a multipage document is being scanned machine already begins calling the other party and transmitting the information even as the remaining pages are being scanned To use memory sending you load the document dial the fax number and pres Start Copy See page 6 20 for more details on memory sending N o xs rs Da i lt j ne c O 72 Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 15 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A KA Zs A 1 1100 book Page 16 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A F T Since machine is multitasking you can even scan a document into the memory while sending a document receiving a document or printing a report 6 16 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 aa HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af AY Zs Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 17 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Dialing Methods There are several ways of dialing the number of the party you want to send to 1 Regular Dialing Use the numeric buttons to dial the recipient s fax number 1 One Touch Speed Dialing Press the One Touch Speed Dialing button 1 to 24 under which you have registered the number you want to send to See Chapter 5 Speed Dialing for details on registering and using One Touch Speed Dialing 1 Coded Speed Dialing Press Coded Dial and enter the
148. d Dialing 5 27 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A a MWB als A 1 1100 book Page 28 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E 1 After entering the first One Touch Speed Dialing button or Coded Speed Dialing code you have five seconds to enter another speed dialing button or code before the machine begins sending automatically If you have entered more than one speed dialing button or code the machine waits for 10 seconds before it begins sending If you do not want the machine to send automatically you need to change the TIME OUT setting See pages 15 7 and 15 8 for more details 3 When you finish entering groups press Start Copy Start Copy 1 The machine then scans the document into memory and begins dialing the numbers in the groups 5 28 Speed Dialing Chapter 5 a Nb HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Chapter 6 Sending Faxes This chapter describes how to use your machine to send faxes E Preparing to Send a Fax osiris iistnssesisisei eii ialis i 6 3 Document Requirements ssessseseestssisseestestsststestesesstentesteststene 6 3 Scanning Ave E E O 6 5 e Selecting Automatic Manual Document Feed eee 6 6 Loading Documents for Automatic Feed ees 6 7 Loading Documents for Manual Feed cccceeteteeeneees 6 11 e Setting the Resolution and
149. d TX type repeat steps 7 to 20 Or If you have finished registering numbers names and TX type press Stop to return to standby mode Stop 1 5 16 Speed Dialing Chapter 5 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 17 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Changing a Number Name Stored under a Coded Speed Dialing Code Follow these steps if you want to change the number and or name registered under a Coded Speed Dialing code or if you want to delete all information stored under a code 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Poi REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGSTRATION 3 Use A or V to select 2 TEL REGISTRATION AY REGISTRATION 2 TEL REGISTRATION 4 Press Set Set lt gt TEL REGISTRATION 1 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL 5 Use A or V to select 2 CODED SPEED DIAL AY TEL REGISTRATION 2 CODED SPEED DIAL 6 Press Set 2 Set Ss CODED SPEED DIAL a 00 2131 1250 3 amp Using Search buttons 7 Use A or V to select a two digit code 00 99 in the display AY CODED SPEED DIAL aa ae 1 432 2060 Chapter 5 Speed Dialing 5 17 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 18 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 Using the Coded Dial button 7 Press Coded Dial then use the numeric buttons to enter the two digit code
150. day December 13 2002 5 07 PM A mi Loading Paper in the Cassette Follow these steps to load paper in the paper cassette 1 Lift the paper cassette slightly and pull it out Machine d J o gt a a c Q 7 Ai 1 Remove the paper cassette being careful not to drop it as you pull it i out Note 11 Filling the paper cassette without removing it completely from the machine may cause the paper to misfeed Be sure to remove the paper cassette completely before loading paper 2 Before loading the paper stack it so that the leading edge and sides of the paper are even Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 41 v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 42 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 3 Load the stack of paper into the paper cassette Ai 1 Make sure the paper stack is not higher than the limit marks vv v LA on the sides of the cassette Note LIMIT MARK 1 Check all corners and edges of the paper stack to be sure they are flat and even 2 42 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 a S HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nb 9 A 1 1100 book Page 43 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A N Note mi 4 Gently insert the paper cassette into the machine until it clicks into position 1 If the paper cassette
151. de garantie pour l change ne peut d passer la p riode de garantie initiale de la Cartouche Toute Cartouche retourn e encore couverte par la pr sente garantie restreinte doit tre emball e dans sa bo te d origine avec une copie de l acte de vente ou de la facture de l achat accompagn e d une description compl te du probl me et doit tre retourn e au D taillant Les frais d exp dition s il y a lieu doivent tre pay s a l avance Les Cartouches couvertes par la pr sente garantie restreinte vous seront retoum es sans frais par le Detaillant AUCUNE GARANTIE OU CONDITION IMPLICITE Y COMPRIS TOUTE GARANTIE OU CONDITION IMPLICITE A L GARD DE LA QUALITE MARCHANDE OU DE L APTITUDE A UNE FIN PARTICULIERE NE S APPLIQUE A LA CARTOUCHE APRES LA PERIODE PRESCRITE DE LA GARANTIE RESTREINTE EXPRESSE SUSMENTIONNEE AUCUNE AUTRE GARANTIE OU CONDITION EXPRESSE OU GARANTIE A L EXCEPTION DE LA GARANTIE RESTREINTE EXPRESSE SUSMENTIONNEE ACCORD E PAR TOUTE PERSONNE OU ENTITE A L GARD DE LA CARTOUCHE N AURA POUR EFFET DE LIER CANON OU TOUT D TAILLANT A L GARD DE TOUTE OBLIGATION QUELLE QU ELLE SOIT CERTAINS TATS ET PROVINCES N AUTORISENT AUCUNE RESTRICTION SUR LA DUR E D UNE GARANTIE IMPLICITE AINSI IL EST POSSIBLE QUE LA RESTRICTION ENONCEE CI DESSUS NE S APPLIQUE PAS DANS VOTRE CAS LES CARTOUCHES USEES NE SONT COUVERTES PAR AUCUNE GARANTIE La pr sente garantie restreinte ne s applique pas au rend
152. document the machine scans when faxing or scanning y MAX 0 16 k MAX 4 0 mm LETTER LEGAL A4 Y MAX 0 16 EJ MAX 4 0 mm MAX 0 12 MAX 0 12 MAX 3 0 mm MAX 3 0 mm The margins of 0 12 3 0 mm on both sides of the sheet and 0 16 4 0 mm on the top and bottom are outside the machine s scanning area A 12 Specifications Appendix t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 13 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM PC Interface Type USB Printer Driver a System requirements IBM or compatible computer with the following Pentium processor Microsoft Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 or Windows XP Windows 98 A 90 megahertz MHz Pentium processor or higher Windows Me A 150 MHz Pentium processor or higher Windows 2000 A 133 MHz Pentium processor or higher Windows XP A 233 MHz Pentium processor or higher At least 32 MB of RAM for Windows 98 Me 64 MB of RAM or more is recommended At least 64 MB of RAM for Windows 2000 XP 128 MB of RAM or more is recommended At least 15 MB of available hard disk space 256 color SVGA monitor or greater USB Port USB cable 16 4 feet 5 meters in length or shorter ao E S 2 ty Oo S a 7 CD ROM drive or access to one over a network connection HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Specifi
153. during software installation to ensure the proper operation of the printer driver See the Printer Driver Software User s Guide 2 22 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 23 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A mi Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Before using your machine look over the diagrams on these pages to become familiar with the machine s components Front View MT i MULTI PURPOSE l TRAY f PAPER GUIDE AUTOMATIC j f SE RELEASE DOCUMENT FEEDER ADF A L I LATCH HANDSET 4 d M 7 L a SUPPORT TRAYS MET al tals d J o gt a a c Q 7 O SOn ane fone So FACE DOWN A DELIVERY SLOT OPERATION FRONT COVER PANEL _ tee PAPER DELIVERY es SELECTOR FACE UP DELIVERY SLOT PAPER CASSETTE EXTENSION TRAY Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 23 a MIP HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 24 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Inside View FX3 CARTRIDGE COMPARTMENT TRANSFER CHARGING ROLLER DO NOT TOUCH PAPER RELEASE LEVER FIXING ASSEMBLY FRONT COVER 2 24 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 ar HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A f o A 1 1100 book Page 25 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Rear View REAR COVER POWER
154. e mode for receiving documents Start Copy button Press this button to begin faxing or copying Resolution button Press this button to select the resolution the machine will use for the document you want to fax or copy Chapter 2 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Setting Up Your Machine 2 27 a MWB als A 1 1100 book Page 28 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B Stop button Press this button to cancel sending receiving or any other operation Set button Press this button to select a menu item when registering information One Touch Speed Dialing panel Open this panel to access the registration buttons 2 28 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 a Nb HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 29 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A s i Special Function Buttons One Touch Speed Dialing Panel Open l C E l w CO w CY Data Delayed Memoli Registration Transmission Polling Reference Report A E Machine Space lt gt w w w CI C3 d J o gt a a c Q 7 Clear V CO CO CO 1 Data Registration button Use this button to register user s data speed dialing and other important settings for sending and receiving 1 Delayed Transmission button Press this button to register a time fo
155. e telephone company is required to give adequate prior notice to the user FCC NOTICE A Note LASER CLASS 2050P Facsimile Transceiver Model H12249 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept an interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult your local auth
156. e the cartridge in salty air or where there are corrosive gases such as from aerosol sprays 1 Do not remove the cartridge from the machine unless necessary DO NOT PLACE THE CARTRIDGE IN FIRE TONER POWDER IS FLAMMABLE Caution 2 32 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L a m SZ Zs Ei Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 33 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Installing Replacing the Toner Cartridge The machine uses a Canon FX3 cartridge The procedure below explains how to install the cartridge for the first time and how to replace it when the toner runs out When the message CHANGE CARTRIDGE appears the toner in the cartridge may simply be unevenly distributed Before replacing the cartridge follow the instructions on page 13 35 to evenly distribute the toner If after doing this the message remains displayed or the print 8 o quality is low replace the cartridge as described below as Ds Ai Canon makes numerous cartridges However the FX3 cartridge is the LA only one which Canon recommends for use with this machine o Note 1 Remove any documents and or printed pages from the machine 2 Make sure the power cord is connected to the machine and to an outlet 3 Open the front cover by lifting the right side release latch of the machine d Lift the cover forward to its open position
157. e the paper delivery delivery for media other than selector to select face up plain paper delivery 13 34 Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 13 aa AY lls HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af A 1 1100 book Page 35 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM w ai Print Quality Problems If the print quality is not what you expect it to be check the problems and solutions below Problem Possible cause Solution Print is not clear The medium you are using Use only print media may not be supported by the specified in Guidelines for machine Selecting Print Media on page 4 2 You may be printing onthe Many types of paper have a wrong side of the paper correct side for printing If your paper does make sure that side is facing up If the paper has no obvious correct side try turning the paper over and printing on the other side The printout has vertical Toner may be low or be Follow these steps white streaks unevenly distributed 1 Open the front cover and take out the FX3 cartridge 2 Gently rock the cartridge side to side five or six times to evenly distribute the toner inside 3 Put the cartridge back into the machine 4 Close the front cover and try printing again If this does not solve the problem replace the FX3 cartridge Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 35 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae a o fa 2
158. eceiving documents To decide which mode will best suit your requirements consider how you want to use the machine FAX TEL AUTO SW You can select Fax Tel Mode MANUAL MODE or ANS MACHINE MODE in FAX TEL AUTO SW FAX ONLY MODE You can select FAX ONLY MODE MANUAL MODE or ANS MACHINE MODE in FAX ONLY MODE DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection The DRPD feature of your machine allows you to have two or more telephone fax numbers assigned to your machine using only one telephone line You can use this feature when you subscribe to a DRP service offered by some telephone companies d Fax Tel Mode Use this mode if you occasionally use the machine as a telephone In this mode if an incoming call is a fax the machine then receives the fax automatically without ringing if the call is from a telephone the machine rings to alert you to pick up the handset or telephone to answer the call This mode is economical in that it allows you to have telephone and fax service without the expense of an additional telephone line This mode also includes settings that let you control precisely how it handles incoming calls To adjust these settings via the operation panel see page 7 5 1 MANUAL MODE Use this mode if you frequently use the machine as a telephone and want to answer every call yourself including fax calls The machine then rings for every call whether telephone or fax and you must press Start Copy to begin recei
159. ed adhesive Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or that are wrinkled or damaged in any way Do not use label sheets with the backing sheet exposed such as labels with spaces between them Ai When feeding labels be sure to use face up delivery See page 4 10 for details Note Transparencies You must use special laser printer transparencies for printing Letter and A4 size laser transparencies should print without any problems 1 To prevent the transparency from curling remove the transparency Da c pc c r d Q Q a as it comes out of the machine and set it on a flat surface to cool N Note When feeding transparencies be sure to use face up delivery See page 4 10 for details Chapter 4 HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Paper Handling 4 5 a AY lls 9 A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A E The Paper Path Understanding how paper feeds through the machine will help you to determine how to load paper and handle paper jams The page travels first to the FX3 cartridge Here a laser beam draws the print image on the drum then the drum applies toner to the page The page then travels to the fixing assembly where the toner is fused to the page The page then exits the machine from the front face up delivery or top face down delivery FA
160. ed in the FX3 cartridge The machine applies the toner to the surface of the photosensitive drum inside the machine via an electrophotographic mechanism Toner saver You can enable or disable economy printing toner saving feature By enabling the ECONOMY PRT setting toner consumption can be decreased by as much as 30 40 percent resulting in a longer effective cartridge life Transaction number A unique number assigned to each fax document sent TX NO or received RX NO by the machine and used to identify that particular fax document Transmit See Sending TTI Transmit Terminal ID See Sender ID TX See Sending U UHQ Ultra High Quality An exclusive Canon digital image processing system that incorporates 64 shades of gray along with a special edge enhancement feature which ensures that text and photos are transmitted with ultimate clarity gt El fo o o So Glossary G 11 m v US HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 12 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM G 12 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L a m SZ Zs Ei Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Index A Activity Report printing 12 2 sample 12 3 Alarm lamp explanation 2 27 ALARM VOLUME setting 15 4 ANS MACHINE MODE description 7 3 using 7 12 Answering
161. ed through the face up or face down delivery slots Choose paper delivery according to the job the machine is performing and the type of print media you are using FACE DOWN DELIVERY FACE UP DELIVERY 4 8 Paper Handling Chapter 4 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mal o SZ A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o Face Down Delivery Face down delivery is used for most jobs and when using plain paper only 17 24lb or 64 90 g m Printed pages are stacked in the order they are printed in the face down delivery slot This slot holds up to approximately 50 sheets of plain paper 201b or 75 g m Move the paper delivery selector backward to the mark FACE DOWN DELIVERY Lo 3 oO I p o a a Chapter 4 Paper Handling 4 9 a o v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Face Up Delivery Face up delivery is mainly used when printing on media other than plain paper such as transparencies labels and envelopes Be sure to use face up delivery when feeding print media other than standard plain paper N Note Move the paper delivery selector forward to the mark FACE UP DELIVERY When using face up delivery you must remove each sheet as it is delivered Failure to do s
162. eed Dialing Dial a fax telephone number by pressing Coded Dial followed by a two digit code assigned to that number 1 Group Dialing Send a document to a pre defined group of fax numbers The numbers must already be stored as One Touch Speed Dialing numbers or Coded Speed Dialing numbers The following pages describe how to register numbers for speed dialing You will also find instructions for changing numbers and names registered under speed dialing buttons and codes and how to use speed dialing 5 2 Speed Dialing Chapter 5 aa AY Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E One Touch Speed Dialing Storing Numbers for One Touch Speed Dialing Your machine can store up to 24 of your most frequently dialed numbers under One Touch Speed Dialing buttons Follow this procedure to store One Touch Speed Dialing numbers and names 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Ea ON RATION 3 Use A or V to select 2 TEL REGISTRATION A y MO TEL REGISTRATION 4 Press Set twice SS eee ka SPD DIAL 5 Use A V or the One Touch Speed Dialing button to select a One Touch Speed Dialing button between 01 and 24 5 5 or oC 4o or SPD DIAL dD S m 3 2 7 1 If anumber is already stored under the button you select that numb
163. eeestenesesesnsnenenes 13 8 Jams Inside the Machine nessen eeni arais 13 10 Jams in the Front Area of the Machine cssesesseceeteeeeeeeees 13 15 Jams in the Rear Cover of the Machine cscescecseceeseeeeeseees 13 18 After Clearing a Paper Jam cccccccccscescenetesesestsneesesceeenessseanens 13 20 Problems Feeding Paper into the Machine cccceeseeesteteees 13 21 Faxing Problems sissies enerne nesenie hatna e An KERE ROue AREAS EREEREER 13 24 Sending Faxes itssogenon eai egene e a e e o Male dete sects 13 24 Receiving Faxe Srei e aeae a eR e a Eae Ea A RERA 13 27 Telephone Problems siiis operi eonan EENES 13 31 Copying Problems ts seiri oree epo ienee K naa Rne EE KEK AKRA REENEN EEE aS 13 32 Printing Problems aee E T E tie E teehee es 13 33 Print Quality Problems raoe e a eeaeee a a EaR RA paea A 13 35 General Problems serisinin sieaa isi 13 36 Ifthe Power Goes Q tb iepa nnrir e E EE REE KREE 13 37 Error Codes Messages and Solutions s ssssssessssessesssssississessesseesesses 13 38 Message nmin ore doam ta ea a A EAE aE E EE OE 13 38 Error T der anas K A IEEE NEVAS sense 13 38 CAUSE E REEE A E A E 13 38 Vaaia To a A E callers 13 38 Chapter 14 Maintaining Your Machine sssssesseesssesseesisstesessresiesiesnsssesieseesesssenees 14 1 Cleaning the Machine ccccccccccceesssneneesessenensescsceesescsnsnsnessseseeneneseeees 14 2 Cleaning the Machine s Exterior ss ssssssss
164. eep track of the transaction operations your machine has performed m m Machine prints sending and receiving transactions together in the same report When sending a document to many locations Broadcast the transaction number will be the same for each transmission in the group You can also print the Activity Report manually if you want to check the report before the 20 transactions are completed Follow this procedure to print the Activity Report 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Report REPORT 1 ACTIVITY REPORT 3 Press Set oS PRINTING REPORT 12 2 Reports and Lists Chapter 12 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mal o Nb ae 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM IF MARKED WITH AN IT ALREADY HAS BEEN PRINTED OUT 12 31 2002 09 58 FAX 8334423 WORLD ESTATE INC 001 See sak a ACTIVITY REPO ST TIME CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID NO MODE PGS RESULT 12 31 08 28 732 2233 ADAM BOOK CPA 0007 TRANSMIT ECM 1 ok 0006 12 31 08 49 1 213 978 3314 BELZERINC 5005 AUTO RX ECM 1 NG 00 20 1 STOP 12 31 09 08 1 213 978 3314 RLOUIS 0008 TRANSMIT ECM 2 NG 00 00 0 995 12 31 09 34 732 2233 ADAM BOOK CPA 0009 TRANSMIT ECM 1 OK 0018 3333 TRANSACTION NUMBER ERROR CODE SEE ERROR CODES MESSAGES AND SOLUTIONS PAGE 13 38 n 2 a v c G n 2 d
165. elect if the time information in your machine changes to match your country s Daylight Saving Time system and set the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts and ends 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration ro REGISTRATION g 1 DATA REGSTRATION De Zgos 3 Press Set Ssg Press Set BES Set gE DATA REGSTRATION 2 1 USER SETTINGS 4 Use A or V to select 7SYSTEM SETTINGS A V DATA REGSTRATION E 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS 5 Press Set then use A or V to select 6 DAYLGHT SAV TIME Set A yv lt gt Cy SYSTEM SETTINGS 6 DAYLGHT SAV TIME 6 Press Set then use A or V to select ON or OFF Sho DAYLGHT SAV TIME D To turn off the Daylight Saving Time setting select OFF Press Set then go to step 16 D To turn on the Daylight Saving Time setting select ON Go to the next step to set the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts and ends Chapter 3 Registering Information in the Machine 3 13 a MWB als HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 14 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 7 Press Set three times Set Set Set M 0 NTH APRIL 8 Use A or V to select the month when Daylight Saving Time starts A V MONTH S MARCH 9 Press Set twice Set Set WEEK FIRST WEEK 10 Use A or V to select the week when Daylight Saving Time starts
166. elephone line Set your machine for type setting on your your telephone line machine is type tone or pulse incorrect 13 38 Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 13 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Ei a es f A 1 1100 book Page 39 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Message Error Code Cause Action BUSY NO SIGNAL 018 The receiving Contact the other continued machine did not party and have them answer within 55 check their machine seconds You can also try to send the document manually For an overseas call add pauses to the registered number CHANGE The toner inside the Redistribute the CARTRIDGE toner cartridge may toner inside the be unevenly toner cartridge See distributed page 13 35 If the message remains replace the toner cartridge See page 2 33 The toner cartridge Replace the toner is empty cartridge See page 2 33 CHECK COVER The toner cartridge Make sure the toner CART is not installed cartridge is installed properly properly See page 2 33 The front coveris Close the front open cover CHECK DOCUMENT 001 A document is Clear the document jammed in the jam See page 13 5 Automatic Then start again Document Feeder ADF CHECK PAPER SIZE The size of the Set the correct paper paper in the paper size in the PAPER cassette the SIZE setting See multi purpose tray pages 15 11 and differs from that 15 12 specified in the PAPER SIZ
167. ement particulier de la Cartouche et ne garantit pas son rendement par exemple le nombre de copies par Cartouche Le rendement de la Cartouche d pend de la densit moyenne des originaux reproduits et d autres facteurs Pour obtenir de plus amples renseignements consultez le manuel d utilisation du Produit de Canon U S A ou de Canon Canada La pr sente garantie sera consid r e comme nulle et non avenue si la Cartouche est endommag e la suite de a l usage abusif la n gligence la manipulation n gligente ou la modification de la Cartouche de I Accessoire d un Produit ou d un Produit dans lequel la Cartouche est ins r e les variations de courant lectrique l exposition a la lumi re ou les accidents b l utilisation impropre y compris omission d observer les directives a l gard de l utilisation ou des conditions d entretien et du milieu ambiant nonc es dans le manuel d utilisation de Canon ou dans d autres documents c l installation ou la r paration effectu es par d autres personnes que les repr sentants au service autoris s de Canon qui agissent selon les calendriers de service Canon ou d l utilisation de pi ces ou de fournitures autres que celles distribu es par Canon qui endommagent la Cartouche et qui causent une fr quence anormalement lev e d appels de service ou de probl mes d entretien La pr sente garantie ne couvre pas les Cartouches dont les num ros de lot initiaux ou les datations ont t d
168. emove the protective sheet from the Automatic Document Feeder ADF then gently close the operation panel by pressing it down from the center until it clicks Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 7 a MIP HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 3 Open the front cover by lifting the right side release latch of the machine 11 Lift the cover forward to its open position 2 8 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 ar HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A F T 5 Lift the paper cassette slightly and pull it out Machine d gt o gt a a c Q 7 6 Remove the shipping tapes and cardboard protector from inside the paper cassette Replaceable Parts The only component of the machine that needs regular service or replacement is the FX3 cartridge Although Canon manufactures many types of toner cartridges the FX3 cartridge is the only one designed to be used with your machine The FX3 cartridge can be purchased at any Canon Facsimile Dealer Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 9 a AY lls HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af 9 a A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Assembling t
169. en use the numeric buttons to enter your telephone number 0 The number can be up to 120 digits long 1 Press Space to enter spaces between numbers spaces are optional and are ignored during dialing 1 If you want to clear a mistaken entry press Clear or lt ao iS 1 To enter a pause in the number press Pause one or more times F 10 Press Set 8 os CODED SPEED DIAL a 2 NAME Chapter 5 Speed Dialing 5 13 a J v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 14 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 11 Press Set again then use the numeric buttons to enter the name you want to store NAME Canon OPTICS 11 For details on entering letters see page 3 2 1 You can store up to 16 characters for the name 12 Press Set Set This completes the minimum settings for registering a two digit Coded Speed Dialing code To continue with the optional settings Go to step 13 To stop here and register another code Press Data Registration Repeat the procedure from step 7 To end the procedure and return to standby mode Press Stop 13 Press Set then use A or V to select ON aod fora SETTING 14 Press Set Set OPT 5 ry ONAL SETTING X TYPE 15 Press Set then use A or V to select the transmission type items Set A y Cc TX TYPE E REGULAR TX TX TYPE PSWD SUBADDRE
170. eneneeseseeteneeeeeees 3 2 Entering Numbers Letters and Symbols 0 0 0 teteeeeeeeteeeeeees 3 2 Editing Informations ee eiar ne aei 3 4 Using the One Touch Speed Dialing Button One Touch Speed Dialing Pae linierne A eieiei s 3 5 Using the Special Function Buttons sssssessessrstsssserttsrterstesntesseentesse 3 5 Using the Men System mies e E n i e 3 6 Personalizing Your Machine ss sssssssssstssrtesssestesssesstssssentesntesstenteessenteessees 3 8 Identifying Your Documents ccscseseteeeteteteseeceesesestenenesesesneeneeeeeeees 3 8 Entering the Date and TIME isisisi tinnis kriteerin erie 3 9 Registering Your Fax Number and Name ssssesssssssrstsstsessesressseesees 3 10 Setting the Telephone Line Type ss ssssesssrssssssrtessserstssssesnesrtesssetes 3 12 Setting Daylight Saving Time s sssssssssstsrssssstssssertessterstesssesnrentessnestes 3 13 Chapter4 Paper Handling orenecneoeni nnie i a kE S i eei 4 1 Guidelines for Selecting Print Media s sssnssssssssssstssssstesssesstsstnsstesteessees 4 2 Plain Paperaren oth iii ereki Ea TE T 4 4 Envelopes nsee oeiee Eea EKE EE Sa oA ETERS AAE AEREE EO Sie 4 4 Fabels sineto m e o Nain dashes e a E EE E E E 4 5 Transparencies sireenin eea aeae e ae EEEa R a REE eA e aE EREA E EESE EE 4 5 The Paper Path syrnet Bh accuse aee EE a A Ea NENESE 4 6 Selecting Paper Delivery asies rip oi siatie ASEA AR eiee aie E EEN 4 8 FaceD wn Delivery sesiessenne remen
171. er appears LI If the button you select is registered for Group Dialing GROUP DIAL appears Chapter 5 Speed Dialing 5 3 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 6 Press Set Set lt gt 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL 1 TELEPHONE NUMBER 7 Press Set again then use the numeric buttons to enter your telephone number Set TELEPHONE NUMBER 000 TEL 20 545 8545_ OOO OOO O00 1 The number can be up to 120 digits long 1 Press Space to enter spaces between numbers spaces are optional and are ignored during dialing 1 If you want to clear a mistaken entry press Clear or lt 1 To enter a pause in the number press Pause one or more times 8 Press Set Set lt D 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL 2 NAME 9 Press Set again then use the numeric buttons to enter the name you want to store NAME A Canon U S A NY 1 For details on entering letters see page 3 2 1 You can store up to 16 characters for the name 5 4 Speed Dialing Chapter 5 eo HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o 10 Press Set Set This completes the minimum settings for registering a One Touch Speed Dialing button To continue with the optional settings Go to step 11 To stop here and reg
172. er of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQ TXXXxX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point e g 03 is a REN of 0 3 This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company Connection to party lines is subjected to state tariffs IN CASE OF EQUIPMENT MALFUNCTION Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the procedures described in this guide disconnect the equipment from the telephone line and the power cord The telephone line or power cord should not be reconnected until the problem is completely resolved Users should contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities for servicing of equipment Information regarding Authorized Service Facility locations can be obtained by calling the Canon Customer Care Center 1 800 423 2366 vi Preface a AY Is HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af NZ ls A 1 1100 book Page vii Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM RIGHTS OF THE TELEPHONE COMPANY Should the equipment cause harm to the telephone network the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service The telephone company also retains the right to make changes in facilities and services which may affect the operation of this equipment When such changes are necessary th
173. ers A A 1 1100 book Page 21 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E 3 Press Start Copy Start Copy 1 The machine then begins scanning the document into memory and dials the number After a few seconds the display shows the number of pages it has scanned TEL 9p8334777 SCANNING P 001 TX 0030 SCANNING P 001 The display then shows the transaction number for the fax This is a unique number machine assigns to the document and is used to identify the document in transaction reports The display continues to show these two displays in order while the machine is sending the fax 1 When machine finishes sending the fax the display shows the TRANSMITTING OK message If an error occurs during sending the machine will print out an error LA report If this happens try sending the fax again See Faxing Problems Note on page 13 24 for details about errors N x 5 a Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 21 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 22 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Adding Pages to the Document in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF The machine Automatic Document Feeder ADF can hold up to 30 letter size 30 A4 size or 20 legal size pages at a time when the document feed lever is set to automatic document feed If your document has more pages than this you can add pages while mac
174. ers the name or company name you want to appear at the top of each fax page you send See page 3 10 4 TX TERMINAL ID Prints your ID transmitting terminal ID on each page of the document you transmit See page 3 8 TTI POSITION Selects whether the sender information is positioned inside or OUTSIDE IMAGE outside the image area See page 3 8 INSIDE IMAGE TELEPHONE Selects the prefix for the machine number See page 3 8 FAX MARK TEL 5 SCAN Selects the scanning contrast See page 6 14 STANDARD CONTRAST DARKER LIGHTER 6 OFFHOOK Enables disables the off hook alarm that alerts you ON ALARM that the handset is not seated properly in its cradle OFF 7 VOLUME Sets the volume of the machine sounds CONTROL CALLING VOLUME Selects the ring volume when the machine detects a voice call 1 2 3 KEYPAD VOLUME Selects the keypad touch beep volume 0 off 1 2 3 ALARM VOLUME Selects the error alarm volume 0 off 1 2 3 LINE MONITOR _ Selects the line monitor volume sound during dialing 0 off 1 2 3 VOL 8 RX CALL LEVEL Selects the ring type for incoming calls HIGH STANDARD 9 TELLINETYPE Selects the telephone line type setting for your machine See TOUCH TONE page 3 12 ROTARY PULSE Default settings are shown in bold type 15 4 The Menu System Chapter 15 o HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Accessing the R
175. es 6 31 e Sending a Document to More Than One Destination 6 31 e Sending a Document Using Group Dialing 0 0 0 ccc eeeeees 6 33 EN Delayed Sending iniia eiee elcid REEE ARa PAA SREE 6 34 e Sending Other Documents While the Machine is Set for Delayed Sending ss sssssesisrssesrtsrtsssterteesserrtesssestes 6 36 6 2 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae a m SZ Zs Ei Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A F T Preparing to Send a Fax Before you can send a fax you need to load the document into machine For instructions and information about the types of documents you can fax with machine see below Document Requirements The documents you load into machine must meet these requirements When the document feed lever is set to Automatic Document Feed Size e Maximum 8 5 x 14 in 216 x 355 9 mm Wx L e Minimum 5 8 x 4 1 in 148 x 105 mm Quantity e Up to 30 letter size 30 A4 size or 20 legal size pages 1 page for sizes other than these Thickness 0 0028 0 005 in 0 07 0 13 mm For pages thicker than this load one page at a time e All sheets should be of the same thickness Weight e 13 24lb 50 90 g m e All sheets should be of the same weight When the document feed lever is set to Manual Document Feed Size e Maximum 8 5
176. es while you are away from your desk Chapter 1 Introducing the Machine 1 5 m V US HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af AS A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM NB Using the Machine With the Printer Driver The printer driver that is included with your machine allows you to use the machine s printing function directly from your PC 1 Use the machine as the default printer for Windows applications For more information on using the printer driver with your machine refer to the Printer Driver Software User s Guide also stored on the CD ROM Ai The supplied printer driver is designed to operate with Windows 98 Zo Windows Me Windows 2000 or Windows XP Note System Requirements The following hardware and software are necessary to operate the printer driver with the machine These are the minimum requirements 1 Windows Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 or Windows XP 1 USB port 1 Computer Processor e Windows 98 A 90 megahertz MHz Pentium processor or higher e Windows Me A 150 MHz Pentium processor or higher e Windows 2000 A 133 MHz Pentium processor or higher e Windows XP A 233 MHz Pentium processor or higher 1 6 Introducing the Machine Chapter 1 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L Ei a g SZ Is w ai A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 0
177. eseecenesesssssteneneseseeneeaeees 7 22 The Machine Set for Automatic Switching Between Fax and Telephone Calls teste triseta beaks reaktie aR oE pesine eass 7 22 xvi Contents HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Ei 7 aa AY Zs MIP Zs ZIN T 1100 book Page xvii Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Chapter8 Using the Memory Features 0 0cccccc cesses essseseeeeeecsseseeeseseseseseeens 8 1 Documents Stored in Memory s se sssssssisessssstsstessserstesseesttsnterstenteestesntesees 8 2 Printing a List of Documents Stored in MeMOTY cseeceeeeeeteseeees 8 2 Printing Documents Stored in Memory ss se sssssestsssserstsrtsrstesstesneestesse 8 3 Method Ipsis usin pa Ea a ASE Aae AERAR ita 8 3 Method 2 3 cnc tecctvines cial wevh e a ER a ae eiie 8 4 Sending Documents Stored in Memory ss se sssssrsrsssserstsrterstesstesseestesse 8 6 Deleting a Document Stored in Memory s se sssssrsssssssrttsrterstesstesneestesse 8 8 Method ssusssisatestsnthrneisi uMsibniihwelid ined ARENE ETAS 8 8 Method Zerene a aN E a itdeash ee dianiien iawn aed 8 9 Chapter9 Setting Up and Using Polling ccc cece teeeeeeeseeeneeseeens 9 1 Wihatis Polling deesset set eeaeee eae tr a ae Ea Te Ea EARE AOSE RE EERE SR EN EE DERE 9 2 Before You Use Polling Receiving s ss se ssssssssssssrsttssserttsrterstesntesneentesss 9 2 Polling to Receive Faxesinonan srana e e ea an n A REE
178. esponds to the edges of the flap 2 ce amp J FLAP S A 3 a C _ PRESS DOWN FIRMLY ON THE EDGES OF THE FLAP Chapter 4 Paper Handling 4 13 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A KA Zs A 1 1100 book Page 14 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a 2 Adjust the paper guides to the approximate width of the stack of envelopes 3 Insert the stack of envelopes print side facing you into the multi purpose tray 1 Insert the stack until it stops but do not force it AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER ADF MULTI PURPOSE TRAY FACE DOWN DELIVERY SLOT 4 14 Paper Handling Chapter 4 HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af ae AY Is 9 A 1 1100 book Page 15 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 4 Adjust the paper guides to the stack of envelopes FACE UP DELIVERY Lo 3 oO I p o a a 1 Be sure to use face up delivery when printing on envelopes Your machine is now ready to print Chapter 4 Paper Handling 4 15 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 16 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 Changing a Paper Size from Letter to A4 Size Paper in the Paper Cassette 1 Lift the paper cassette slightly and pull it out 2 Hold the center part of the front paper guide with your finger Gentl
179. estions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af Chapter 13 mal n ar Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 15 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Jams in the Front Area of the Machine If the top edge of the paper has passed through the fixing assembly 1 Pass the paper under the roller as shown o fa 2 D Ej Co Frequently Asked 2 Use both hands to carefully pull the jammed paper I Be sure to pull gently otherwise the paper may tear and remain inside the machine 1 Be sure to remove all the jammed paper Not doing so will cause paper to jam again Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 15 HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af a AZ lls A 1 1100 book Page 16 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E If the paper has jammed near the face up delivery slot Hold the front cover and gently pull the sheet through the exit slot LA Do not close the front cover while removing a jammed sheet of paper This will return the paper release lever to its locked position Note 13 16 Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 13 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A a MB A 1 1100 book Page 17 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 I The fixing assembly shaded becomes extremely hot when the machine is in use Be very careful not to touch it When removing t
180. g Information in the Machine HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mal B t A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Using the One Touch Speed Dialing Button One Touch Speed Dialing Panel The One Touch Speed Dialing buttons allow you to use speed dialing o S ao Efe ec amp Lor 2g SES gE o 2 Using the Special Function Buttons Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel to access the Special Function buttons These Special Function buttons consist of the Delayed Transmission button Report button etc Jf J l C e CO e l J C EZ Data Dek ry Registration Transmission Polling Reference E Report A Cy GC GC CO lt Space CO CO CO CO Clear Vv S ES eS Chapter 3 Registering Information in the Machine 3 5 an v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Using the Menu System A The machine employs a menu system you can use to register important information or to set up important features The system includes these items 1 DATA REGSTRATION USER SETTINGS Lets you enter the information that prints on the documents you send set the scanning contrast and enter other basic data Enter these
181. g documents with intermediate tones such as photographs Polling One machine requesting another to send a document The receiving party calls th machine holding the document to be sent and requests that it be sent Printable area The area of a sheet of paper on which a printer can reproduce text or graphics the printing area is smaller than the paper On this machine the printing area varies depending on the type of paper being used Printer driver The printer driver allows you to use the machine as a printer for your PC with Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 or Windows XP installed To use the machine as a printer install the supplied printer driver in your PC Pulse See Rotary pulse Q Quick on line sending Quick on line sending is the easiest and quickest way to send a document After a document is set in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF the machine begins to scan the entire document into the memory As the first page of a multi page document is being scanned your machine will begin to call the other party and transmit the information even as the remaining pages are being scanned The machine scans the document quickly so you can get it back in a few moments and return to work gt El fo o o So Glossary G 7 a v US HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af AS A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM NB R RAM Random Access
182. g feature allows you to request a document to be faxed to you from another machine The sender only needs to make sure the document is on his machine and ready to be sent when your machine polls that machine the document is sent automatically The machine can poll any machine that supports polling Requesting Another Machine to Send a Document 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel se 25 2 Press Polling ae olin S pens POLLING a 1 POLLING TX N 3 Use A or y to select 2 POLLING RX Ao y POLLING 2 POLLING RX 4 Press Set z TEL Chapter 9 Setting Up and Using Polling 9 3 a v ils A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E 5 Enter the destination s using any of the following three methods 1 One Touch Speed Dialing Press the desired One Touch Speed Dialing button s 01 24 1 Coded Speed Dialing Press Coded Dial then enter the two digit code 00 99 using the numeric buttons co e Be sure to press Coded Dial before each code 1 Regular Dialing Enter the number using the numeric buttons or press Redial P E edial Oo 5 e You can only enter one number with the numeric buttons It is not possible to enter a subaddress or password when using regular dialing Note If necessary use One Touch Speed Dialing or Coded Speed Dialing witha registered password or subaddress IN 6 When y
183. ges were transmitted either during the first attempt or after the first or second retry NG means that either some or no pages were transmitted after two retries Multi TX RX Report If you used sequential broadcasting to send a document the Multi TX RX Report is printed 12 31 2002 09 58 FAX 8334423 WORLD ESTATE INC id 001 REPORT SRR RR AR RR ah a baa a TX RX NO 0013 PGS 1 TX RX INCOMPLETE TRANSACTION OK 01 732 2233 JOHN BARRISTER 03 1 914 438 3619 SEYMOUR GREEN ERROR INFORMATION d If you set your machine to print activity reports TX Report or RX Report and then use sequential broadcastings or polling reception with multiple parties multi activity report will be printed instead of the activity report Sending or Receiving See TX REPORT and RX REPORT in REPORT SETTINGS on pages 15 5 and 15 6 12 6 Reports and Lists Chapter 12 o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Ge Reception RX Report Normally the machine does not print a reception report RX Report unless you set it to do so You can set the machine to print the RX Report every time you receive a document or only if an error occurs during receiving See pages 15 5 and 15 6 for details on setting this option 12 31 2002 09 58 FAX 8334423 WORLD ESTATE INC q 001 RECEPTION OK TX RX NO 500
184. he Machine Use the following instructions to assemble your machine s main unit and components To see how the machine will look fully assembled see Getting Acquainted with Your Machine on page 2 23 Attaching Components Attaching the Paper Loading Warning Label The paper loading warning label is included with your machine Attach the label to the left of the multi purpose tray as shown below 2 10 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mal ar A 1 1100 book Page 11 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A s i Attaching the Extension Tray To attach the extension tray insert the tab into the corresponding slot as shown in the illustration below Pull the inside extension tray towards you Make sure the tab is inserted securely into the slot N Note 3 o of 25 Ps 8 Straightening the Multi Purpose Tray To straighten the paper rest hold its center tab and pull it up until it stops Then unfold the attached flap Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 11 a MIP HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 12 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Attaching the Support Trays There are two identical support trays One of the support trays holds paper as it comes out of the face down delivery slot To install this suppo
185. he jammed paper be careful not to touch the transfer charging roller as its surface is very delicate and susceptible to finger oil and scratches which may lead to print quality deterioration Caution gO So O x ge 22 TS 25 z0 o WL A CAUTION HOT SURFACE AVOID CONTACT ACHTUNG HEISS PRECAUCIONVATTENZIONE ALTA TEMPERATURA Lets TRANSFER CHARGING ROLLER FIXING ASSEMBLY Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 17 a S HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A MIP f A 1 1100 book Page 18 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Jams in the Rear Cover of the Machine 1 Open the rear cover Ai Lift the paper cassette slightly and pull it out a little to help pulling out LA jammed paper Note 2 Gently pull out any jammed paper from the rear area being careful not to tear it 13 18 Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 13 n ar HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 19 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a 3 Close the rear cover make sure it clicks in place So o x e 22 TS 25 50 o WL Ai Gently insert the paper cassette into the machine until it clicks into LA position Note Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 19 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A an v ils Nip ANS A 1
186. he machine may have a on and the machine paper jam beeps while printing The machine may have no paper jam Solution Clear any paper jams as described earlier in this chapter Disconnect the power cord wait five seconds then reconnect it If the problem is fixed the Alarm lamp will be off and the LCD display will show the date and receiving mode standby mode If the Alarm lamp stays on call your local authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer Nothing prints The power cord may not be connected securely The toner cartridge may need to be replaced Make sure the power cord is connected securely to the machine and to a wall outlet Replace the toner cartridge See page 2 33 Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 33 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae a o fa 2 D Ej Co Frequently Asked aa AY lls Ei Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 34 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Problem Possible cause Solution Printout does not match Paper may not be loaded and Make sure the paper is paper size aligned correctly inthe paper loaded correctly cassette the multi purpose See page 2 39 tray The printout curls Your pages may include a Remove the printout as large amount of toner soon as it exits the machine and then roll it in the direction opposite of the curl The paper jams You may be using face down Us
187. hine is scanning 1 Wait until the last sheet in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF starts feeding 2 Load up to 30 additional sheets 20 legal size 1 Insert the aaa new page so that it overlaps the last page by about 1 inch 2 5 cm AN s 4 2 5 cm m 41 Wait until all pages of your document have been scanned completely LA before starting a new job Note 6 22 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 a MIP HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 23 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B Canceling Sending If you want to stop sending before the transmission is finished do the following 1 Press Stop Stop 0 If you are sending manually the transmission is canceled immediately 1 If you are sending from memory the following appears in the display CANCEL DURING TX RX YES NO 2 To cancel sending press Tone 1 If you change your mind and want the machine to continue sending press The machine will continue sending normally After you cancel a fax you may need to open the operation panel to remove the document from the Automatic Document Feeder ADF See Caution Removing the Document From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on the following pages N o xs re Da i lt j ne c O 72 Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 23 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A
188. ie e EAEN E 1 5 Using the Machine With the Printer Driver cccsececeeseseeeens 1 6 System Requirements ccccccsccceescccesesescenetesesesssneesesceeesesesesnens 1 6 Using Your Documentation ccccccccssecsescessseseeecesenssstecsessenenaneees 1 8 e How to Use This User s Guide cccccccccccsesseseeststeteteseeceneseseseens 1 8 e Type Conventions Used in This User s Guide ccccccceeees 1 9 Customer Support occcsccccccccscccsecsessccsderstesedscacsetecssseserbseteesedetessenesdreeenes 1 10 Safety Instructions sanese eere e o S EE ES E i 1 11 Chapter 1 Introducing the Machine 1 1 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae mal a o r a Introducing the VA US A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o Welcome Thank you for purchasing the new Canon LASER CLASS 2050P We are sure that your machine will meet your printing and copying needs easily and conveniently as well as your fax and telephone requirements LASER CLASS 2050P 1 2 Introducing the Machine Chapter 1 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL see l Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a The Main Features of the Machine o The machine is a multifunction system for your home or small office The fs machine combines a plain paper fax machine a copier and a telephone EF
189. ified Huffman MH Modified READ MR and Modified Modified READ MMR Gray scale Representing color in black and white as a result of different intensities of color Different colors and intensities of colors appear as different shades of gray Group Dialing A dialing method that enables you to dial up to 123 registered One Touch Speed Dialing or Coded Speed Dialing numbers together as a group This means that you can press just one or three buttons to enter numbers when sending the same document to many destinations H Halftone Using this method the machine produces shades of gray by mapping dots to be printed G 4 Glossary m SZ Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a I Interface The connection between two devices that makes it possible for them to communicate with each other The machine features a USB interface which makes it compatible with IBM and similar personal computers Interface cable The cable used to create the interface between a printer and a computer Interface port The machine comes with one USB port located on the back of the machine You attach the cable that connects your computer and machine to this port ITU T Formerly known as CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone CCITT has been replaced by the International Telecommunications Union Teleco
190. ine to receive telephone calls if you have the handset or a telephone connected to the machine and to make calls if you have a telephone connected to the machine You cannot send or receive faxes print or make copies Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 37 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae o fa 2 D Ej Co Frequently Asked mal a g VA US f A 1 1100 book Page 38 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Error Codes Messages and Solutions This table lists the messages that appear in the machine LCD display and the corresponding error codes that appear in activity reports and tells what to do for each METEC Error Code AUTO REDIAL BUSY NO SIGNAL 018 Cause The machine is waiting to redial the other party s fax number because the line was busy or the other party did not answer when you tried to send the document The telephone number you dialed is busy The fax number Action Wait for the machine to automatically redial the fax number See page 6 26 Try sending the document again later Check the fax dialed was number and dial incorrect again The other party s Contact the other machine is not party and have them working properly check their machine The other party is Contact the other not using a G3 party and have them machine send or receive the document using a G3 machine The t
191. ing figure shows the printable area for envelopes a Printable area U S Commercial No 10 European DL a 41 a 110mm b Max 0 16 b Max 4 0 mm c Max 0 16 c Max 4 0 mm d 9 5 d 220mm e 0 16 e Max 4 0mm f 0 39 f Max 10mm For some envelope types the edges of the envelope can not be printed on Caution A 10 Specifications Appendix Nb HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 11 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o Document Sizes The following illustrations show the largest and smallest documents you can feed into the machine When the document feed lever is set to Automatic document feed Maximum Document Size Minimum Document Size 8 5 5 87 216 mm 148 mm 4 1 105 mm A MAXIMUM OF 32 MINUTES FOR EACH PAGE OR 14 355 9 mm IN LENGTH When the document feed lever is set to Manual document feed 7 Note that the scanning length may be shorter than the length of the actual 5 document 5 Maximum Document Size Minimum Document Size n oy p 8 5 4 5 8 2 216 mm 148 mm 4 1 105 mm A MAXIMUM OF 32 MINUTES FOR EACH PAGE OR APPROX 39 1m IN LENGTH Appendix Specifications A 11 v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 12 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B The figure below shows how much of a legal letter or A4 size
192. isplayed To store a group under a Coded Speed Dialing code 7 Press Coded Dial then use the numeric buttons to enter an unused two digit code 00 to 99 Coded Dial P DIAL CoO ie 1 Ifa group or number is already registered under the code you select GROUP DIAL or CODED SPEED DIAL is displayed 1 To continue storing under a Coded Speed Dialing code you can use A or V also 41 1 Each One Touch Speed Dialing button or Coded Speed Dialing code can store either a name and number for speed dialing or a group Be Note careful not to override speed dialing numbers and names when creating and registering groups d If you wish to register a group under a One Touch Speed Dialing button or Coded Speed Dialing code already registered for speed dialing or if you want to re enter a group you must delete the previous information first See pages 5 7 and 5 17 for more details 5 24 Speed Dialing Chapter 5 an Nb HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A N Note a A 1 1100 book Page 25 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Press Set twice L ONE NUMBER Enter the speed dialing numbers you want to store in the group 1 To enter in the group a number stored under a One Touch Speed Dialing button press the desired One Touch Speed Dialing button s ac 240 1 To enter a number stored under a coded speed dialing code press Coded Dial then enter the two digit code fo
193. ister another button Press Data Registration Repeat the procedure from step 5 To end the procedure and return to standby mode Press Stop 11 Press Set then use A or V to select ON ood pou SETTING 12 Press Set Set IONAL SETTING STX TYPE ee 13 Press Set then use A or V to select the transmission type items Set A v a a ie REGULAR TX ia TY E SWD SUBADDRESS The TX TYPE menu includes these items REGULAR TX Designates the transaction as a normal transmission with no special features You can cancel the currently set PSWD SUBADDRESS by selecting REGULAR TX dD S m 3 2 7 PSWD SUBADDRESS Allows you to enter an ITU T password or subaddress for the transmission 1 SUBADDRESS The ITU T subaddress for the transmission 2 PASSWORD The ITU T password for the transmission Chapter 5 Speed Dialing 5 5 e MWB als HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B 14 Press Set to store TX TYPE If you select REGULAR TX it goes back to 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL If you want to register another One Touch Speed Dialing button repeat the procedure from step 5 To return to standby mode press Stop Set To perform PSWD SUBADDRESS settings 15 Press Set then use the numeric buttons to enter a subaddress S
194. k the TX RX number if necessary See page 12 2 The machine SCANNING P nnn sending a document continues to send MEMORY FULL and its memoryis the document as Three messages full memory becomes toggle available Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 45 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae o fa 2 5 D Ej Co Frequently Asked Ei a t Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 46 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a 13 46 Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 13 HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af aa AY Zs MP SPI ZI F 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Chapter 14 Maintaining Your Machine Your machine requires no maintenance other than periodic cleaning and replacing of the toner cartridge as needed E Cleaning the Machine res gisisenite neinn e an e 14 2 e Cleaning the Machine s Exteriot s ses ssssssssssssesrssssesstsnteessereee 14 2 e Cleaning the Inside of the Machine c cccccseseeteeseeseteseeeeees 14 3 e Cleaning the Scanner Components sss ssessrssssssrstssssesstsrterstetee 14 6 d Transporting the Machine ss sessssssessssrtssssertessneestssnsesstsntesstenteess 14 9 Chapter 14 Maintaining Your Machine 14 1 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae a e gt ov DE 8 f VA US Ei AS
195. l you see on the LCD display when you register numbers and names in the machine Press lt or gt to move the cursor Glossary HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mal o SZ Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM D Delayed sending The ability to send a document at a preset time in the future You do not have to be in your office to use delayed sending to one or more destinations You can set up only one delayed transmission at a time on the machine Dialing methods Ways of pressing one or more buttons to access a number to connect to an outside party or fax machine Dialing methods include One Touch Coded Speed Dialing Group Dialing and regular Dialing with the numeric buttons Document The sheet of paper containing the data that you send to or receive from a machine dpi Dots per inch A unit of measurement for indicating a machine s resolution Your machine produces a resolution of 600 dpi Dual access Multitasking Enables the machine to receive a fax even if it is copying or printing a document Also enables you to scan other documents into memory make copies print out reports print documents or register information while the machine sends a document from memory E ECM Error Correction Mode The ability of your machine to reduce system and line errors when sending or receiving from another machine with ECM capability ECM is most effe
196. layed try inserting the paper cassette again Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 9 an v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o Jams Inside the Machine 1 Open the front cover by lifting the release latch on the right side of the machine 1 Lift the cover forward to its open position Do not open the front cover without lifting the release latch as this may cause damage to your machine Caution 13 10 Frequently Asked Questions i HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af Chapter 13 mal o MB A 1 1100 book Page 11 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a 2 Hold the cartridge by its handle and remove it from the machine 1 Cover the cartridge with its original protective bag or a cloth to protect it from the light So O x ge 22 TS 25 3G o WL HANDLE 3 Move the paper release lever toward the back of the machine Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 11 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A a MB 9 A 1 1100 book Page 12 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E 4 Locate the jammed piece of paper 1 First check the inside of the machine and then the front area The fixing assembly shaded becomes extremely hot when the machine is in
197. le or Duplex It should be independent from copiers heaters air conditioners or any electric equipment that is thermostatically controlled The rated value is 120 127 volts and 15 amperes Preface ix HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L Ei a m SZ Zs AS A 1 1100 book Page x Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM NB NOTICE This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications This is confirmed by the registration number The abbreviation IC before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment Cet appareil est conforme aux Sp cifications techniques des quipements terminaux de l Industrie du Canada Ceci est confirm par le num ro d enregistrement L abr viation IC pr c dant le num ro d enregistrement signifie que l enregistrement a t effectu sur la base de la D claration de conformit indiquant que le produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques du Canada Ceci n implique pas que le produit ait t approuv par l industrie du Canada Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must al
198. llowing MEMORY USED 0 DOCUMENT READY 2 Press Start Copy 1 The display now shows COPY the reduction size the copy will be printed at the default is 100 the number of copies the default is 01 and the selected paper supply the default is cassette m If you press Resolution you can select TEXT or PHOTO LY Use PHOTO resolution when copying documents that contain photographs This scans areas of the document that contain photos with 64 levels of gray and results in a much better reproduction of the photograph 1 Use TEXT resolution when copying documents that contain texts 11 2 Making Copies Chapter 11 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mal B a MIP A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E 3 Ifyou want to reduce the size of the copies open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel and use lt or gt to select the reduction percentage you want lt gt eases 100 COPY 01 CASSETTE LTR You can select 70 80 90 or 100 4 Ifyou want to make multiple copies use the numeric buttons to enter the number of copies COPY 100 CASSETTE L AS mo 1 You can make up to 99 copies The machine scans at 400 x 300 dpi for single copies and at 200 x 300 dpi for multiple copies For high resolution copying make one copy at a time N Note 5 Use A or y to select the paper supply A v co
199. m from the menu or press Stop to cancel the menu selection and return to standby mode Stop Set D or o S ao Efe ec amp Lor 2g SES gE o 2 Chapter 3 Registering Information in the Machine 3 7 a MWB als HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Personalizing Your Machine Identifying Your Documents FCC rules governing the use of fax equipment require you to include your name or company name your fax number and the date and time of transmission on each fax you send This information is called your TTI Transmit Terminal Identification and appears at the top of the faxed document in small type By identifying the documents you send the receiving party can recognize your fax messages at a glance Here is a sample document with the identifying information 12 31 2002 10 12 FAX 516 488 6700 CANON U S A CANON CANADA 001 THE DATE AND TIME YOU SENT THE OU CN ee THE SLEREXE COMPANY LIMITED SAPORS LANE BOO E DORSET BH25 8ER VED TELEPHONE BOOLE 9 5 13 51617 FAX 123456 BEFORE THE NUMBER YOUR NAME OR E THE NAME OF THE PARTY WHO IS RECEIVING THE FAX THE PAGE NUMBER If you send a fax using speed dialing the top line also includes the name registered under the speed dialing button or code you entered The following pages explain how to enter this informati
200. m the answering machine s security code See pages 15 9 and 15 10 for details on changing the code REMOTE RX ID setting Receiving Faxes Automatically FAX ONLY MODE When the machine is set up for a dedicated line set FAX ONLY MODE to automatically receive documents whenever a call comes over the fax line m The machine assumes all incoming calls are from fax machines sending documents It receives the documents automatically and disconnects all voice calls In FAX ONLY MODE you can control whether or not the machine rings when it receives a fax call To set this option from the machine operation panel See pages 15 9 and 15 10 INCOMING RING setting Chapter 7 Receiving Faxes 7 11 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae a o 0 x lt in dD 2 D D as a AZ lls Ei AS A 1 1100 book Page 12 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM NB Using an Answering Machine ANS MACHINE MODE Connecting an answering machine to the machine allows you to receive faxes and telephone messages while you are out of the office For instructions on connecting an answering machine to the machine see Connecting an Extension Telephone or Answering Machine on page 2 18 Canon does not recommend using an answering service like those offered by local telephone companies that provide voice mail on the Note telephone line you are connecti
201. mat that the computer understands N Noise A term applied to a variety of problems that impair the operation of telephone lines used for faxing Numeric buttons The round numbered buttons on the operation panel marked the same as a standard telephone keypad Press them to perform regular dialing You also use the numeric buttons to enter numbers and letters when you register numbers and names and for entering coded speed dialing codes 0 One Touch Speed Dialing An automatic Dialing method that allows you to dial a fax or telephone number by pressing a single One Touch Speed Dialing button The machine can store up to 24 numbers for One Touch Speed Dialing One Touch Speed dialing buttons The buttons numbered 1 to 24 on the operation panel each of which may be registered as a fax or telephone number Once a number is registered you press one button to dial the entire number P Paper feed Refers to guiding a sheet of paper into the machine s paper path G 6 Glossary HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L Ei a m SZ Zs A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM SA ZIN Pause A timing entry required for registering certain long distance numbers and for dialing out through some telephone systems or switchboards Pressing Pause enters a pause between digits of a telephone number Photo The document setting you use for sending or copyin
202. may from the machine are not be working properly spotted or dirty The document may not be properly inserted in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF The machine cannot The receiving machine may send a fax using ECM not support ECM Check the machine by making a copy If the image is clear the problem may be in the receiving machine Remove the document and feed it correctly into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF If the receiving machine does not support ECM then the machine sends the fax in normal mode without error checking Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae 13 25 xo o x e 22 ES 25 50 o ire Ei m V US KA Zs A 1 1100 book Page 26 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Problem Possible cause Solution The machine cannot senda ECM receiving on the fax using ECM receiving machine may be continued turned off ECM sending on the machine may be turned off If the receiving machine does support ECM reception call the other party and have them check if ECM reception is turned on Turn ECM sending on See pages 15 7 and 15 8 ECM TX setting Errors occur frequently The telephone line may be in while sending faxes poor condition or you may have a poor connection Lower the speed at which the machine starts sending faxes in the TX START SPEED setting See pages 15 15 and 15 1
203. memory can store approximately 256 letter size pages Messages Displayed When Documents are Received in Memory If the machine receives a document into its memory the LCD displays one of the following messages These messages show the action you must take to correct the problem Cause Action Cause Action Cause Action The toner cartridge ran out of toner or is not installed properly Make sure the cartridge is installed properly and install a new one if necessary See Installing Replacing the Toner Cartridge on page 2 33 ae CARTRIDGE The machine ran out of paper Add paper to the paper cassette the multi purpose tray See Loading Recording Paper on page 2 39 ESD PAPER A paper jam occurred Clear the jam See Paper Jams on page 13 5 CLEAR PAPER JAM Chapter 7 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Receiving Faxes 7 13 a v ils A 1 1100 book Page 14 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Cause Over capacity in the face down delivery slot Action Take out sheets from delivery slot and clear the paper jam See Paper Jams on page 13 5 CLEAR PAPER JAM Once you have corrected the problem the machine automatically prints the documents stored in memory Receiving While Registering Copying or Printing Since the machine is a multitasking device it can receive documents and telephone calls while you are ente
204. ments esonora e E e chee dente eae tse acne ree eee ce dst 6 18 Manual Sending Via the Handset cccccceececeesesesteneteseseeeeteneeees 6 18 Memory Sending neisse u aka n EE A r E 6 20 Adding Pages to the Document in the Automatic Document Feeder ADEren iee ii e a aL E E E A a 6 22 Contents xv HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Ei a SZ TUS NZ Zs ZI LIT00 book Page xvi Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Canceling Sending issiga e ae n ETa alea EARR AE AERES ARET EEEREN E 6 23 Removing the Document From the Automatic Document Feeder ADE ifini aiin e raa anaa a arnar ia teea laaa aiian 6 24 Redialin sesiis neiaa sar Aaa nao aiea ATANES 6 26 Manual Redialing soais tree iaren irna asnata eoa EEEE sk EARE DAER KE K REEE EEEE Ean 6 26 Automatic Redialing With Memory Sending s s sssssesssrssssssrtssseeste gt 6 26 Canceling Automatic Redialing c cece cteteeseeteeeseeeeneeeees 6 27 Setting Up Automatic Redialing occ ccccccccteseseststeteeseeeeteeeees 6 28 Sequential Broadc sting iit irestart toastis KEE aa 6 31 Sending a Document to More Than One Destination 00 6 31 Sending a Document Using Group Dialing ses sssssrstsrtsrssrrtssseerte gt 6 33 Delayed Sendi gss sriti vanr ras eae a R aa EE IEN 6 34 Sending Other Documents While the Machine is Set for Delayed Sending eea oea ia E tle cies AEREE ot eee E 6 36 Chapter Receivitig Faxes simmosest asir k eE E aaa E
205. mmunications sector ITU T a committee created to set international standards for telecommunications J Jack The telephone receptacles on your wall or on your machine used to connect the machine to the telephone line answering machine handset or telephone M Manual receiving A method of receiving faxes in which you answer all incoming calls using the handset If you hear a slow beep it indicates an incoming fax transmission from another machine Just press Start Copy to receive the incoming fax gt El fo o o So Manual redialing When you use regular dialing you can redial a number manually simply by pressing Redial on the operation panel The last number called is the number redialed Glossary HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af G5 a v US Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Memory broadcast Allows you to send a scanned fax to as many as 125 locations at once using a combination of One Touch Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing and regular dialing Memory sending Scans a document into memory before the machine dials the number s and sends it This method allows you to retrieve your original document immediately after scanning Modem A device that converts MOdulates digital data for transmission over telephone lines At the receiving end this device converts the modulated data DEModulates to digital for
206. mode S 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD Registering Information in the Machine 3 11 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af o S ao Efe ec amp Lor 2g SES gE o 2 mal E v als A 1 1100 book Page 12 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o Setting the Telephone Line Type Use this procedure if you need to change the telephone line setting If you are unsure which setting to use contact your local telephone company 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Data 5 CUN 3 Press Set twice Set Set PATOK SERTAR PSB SETE Hie 4 Use A or V to select 9 TEL LINE TYPE AY i HE TEL LINE TYPE 5 Press Set then use A or V to select the correct telephone line type Set A y Se er ae OUCH TONE E EINE ROTARY PULSE 6 Press Set to save the telephone line type Set DATA REGSTRATION 2 REPORT SETTINGS 7 Press Stop to return to standby mode 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD 3 12 Registering Information in the Machine Chapter 3 eo HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 13 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Setting Daylight Saving Time Some countries adopt the Daylight Saving Time system that shifts the clock time ahead or back according to the change in seasons You can s
207. n indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five Le Nombre d quivalence Ringer REN de cet appareil terminal est 1 0 Le REN attribu chaque quipement terminal fournit une indication sur le nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant tre connect s sur une interface t l phonique La terminaison sur une interface peut consister en n importe quelle combinaison d appareils la condition seulement que la somme des Nombres d quivalence Ringer de tous les appareils ne soit pas sup rieure 5 CANON CANADA INC 1 800 263 1121 24 HOURS A DAY SEVEN DAYS A WEEK Preface xi F SZ TUS HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af A 1 1100 book Page xii Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Safety Information Laser Safety The machine complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 This means that the machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam canno
208. n memory 8 2 problems 13 33 Problems copying 13 32 faxing 13 24 feeding paper 13 21 general 13 36 index 13 3 printing 13 33 printing quality 13 35 receiving faxes 13 27 sending faxes 13 24 telephone 13 31 Index HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae mal AZ lls Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 6 36 PM Pulse line setting 3 12 using tone dialing ona 10 4 R Receive mode ANS MACHINE MODE 7 3 FAX ONLY MODE 7 3 Receive Mode button explanation 2 27 RECEIVED IN MEMORY message 13 44 Receiving ANS MACHINE MODE 7 3 7 12 canceling 7 15 9 5 Fax Tel Mode 7 2 7 5 inmemory 7 13 MANUAL MODE 7 2 7 10 manually 7 10 printing 7 14 problems 13 27 registering 7 14 while copying 7 14 while printing 7 14 while registering 7 14 with answering machine 7 12 Reception RX report 12 7 Recording paper loading 2 39 Redial button explanation 2 27 REDIAL INTERVAL setting 15 8 REDIAL TIMES setting 15 8 Redialing 6 26 canceling 6 27 manual 6 26 setting up 6 28 Reduction when copying 11 2 11 3 Registering date 3 9 guidelines 3 2 receiving while 7 14 time 3 9 your fax number 3 10 yourname 3 10 Release latch 2 23 REMOTE RX setting 15 10 Removing document from ADF 6 24 shipping materials 2 7 Replaceable parts 2 9 Replacing cartridge 2 33 Report 12 1 activity 12 2 error TX 12 4 memory clear 12 8 multi TX RX report 12 6 reception RX 12 7
209. ncoding methods that increase transmission speed to approximately 3 seconds per page Memory sending receiving The machine can store up to 256 pages either received or to be sent in its built in memory and can receive documents while printing Reduced size printing The machine automatically scales received documents to fit the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette or the multi purpose tray So if your client is sending you an A4 size paper and you have letter size paper in the multi purpose tray the document will be scaled down and printed on letter size paper Automatic dialing and broadcasting To make faxing even easier the machine provides several automatic dialing methods One Touch Speed Dialing Coded Speed Dialing and Group Dialing The machine also enables you to broadcast faxes or send faxes at a preset time to as many as 125 locations at once Flexible document feeding The machine includes an Automatic Document Feeder ADF that can be set for automatic document feed or manual document feed according to your needs This allows you to fax a variety of documents from multipage documents to a single photo or business card Printer Features Excellent print quality The machine offers 600 x 600 dpi laser beam printing providing you with high resolution text and graphics Simple maintenance The FX3 cartridge for the machine contains both the toner and drum making installation and replacement simple
210. ng to the machine If you do subscribe to an answering service you may want to dedicate a separate line for fax communication only and connect that line to the machine N Using the Machine with an Answering Machine Follow these guidelines when using the machine with an answering machine 1 Set the answering machine to answer on the first or second ring 1 If the machine runs out of paper or toner in ANS MACHINE MODE it receives all documents into memory The faxes then print automatically when you add paper or replace the toner cartridge 1 When recording the outgoing message on the answering machine the entire message must be no more than 15 seconds long For example Hello I can t answer the phone right now but please leave a message after the beep I ll return your call as soon as possible Thank you 7 12 Receiving Faxes Chapter 7 F SZ TUS HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af f Documents Received in Memory LA Note A 1 1100 book Page 13 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A The machine will automatically receive incoming faxes into its memory if it encounters a problem that prevents it from printing normally The LCD will display a message showing the problem See below the error messages their cause and the action you need to take to correct the problem mi N o x lt oO Lu te gt o O o a The machine s
211. nication type for each ring pattern defaults to TEL except for the DOUBLE RING pattern which defaults to Note FAX After you select the ring pattern that has been assigned for your fax communications you need to make sure that the other ring patterns are not set to FAX Otherwise the machine may answer as a fax for each ring pattern IN Chapter 7 Receiving Faxes 7 21 a S v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A AS NB A 1 1100 book Page 22 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a How DRPD Responds to Calls When there is an incoming call the machine checks the incoming ring pattern and determines the type of pattern being received The machine may require up to 10 seconds to determine the pattern type and during this time the machine does not ring After the pattern is detected the machine reacts according to how you registered the setting Your Setting Incoming Call Incoming Call From Fax Machine From Telephone FAX Receives the fax document Answers as a fax without ringing machine TEL Rings to alert you to pick Rings to alert you to pick up the handset Press up the handset or Start Copy to receive the extension telephone fax manual reception and take the telephone call FAX TEL Switches to receive mode Rings to alert you to pick AUTO SW for fax transmission up the handset or signals and does not ring extension telephone and take the teleph
212. nly the numbers registered for speed dialing on your machine This feature is A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM useful to prevent reception of unsolicited faxes e g junk mail Follow this procedure to enable or disable receiving restriction 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel and press Data Registration Ferien REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGSTRATION 2 Press Set Se DATA REGSTRATION gt 1 USER SETTINGS 3 Use A or V to select 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS A V DATA REGSTRATION 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS 4 Press Set 2E SYSTEM SETTINGS co 1 RX RESTRICTION 5 Use A or y to select 1 RX RESTRICTION A v SYSTEM SETTINGS D 1 RX RESTRICTION 6 Press Set Set ey RX RESTRICTION 7 Use A or V to select the setting you want A v Cc icy 1 To enable restriction select ON then go to the next step 10 6 Special Features Chapter 10 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mal E t A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o 1 To disable restriction select OFF then go to step 10 8 Press Set Set RX CON C RE ED SENDR 9 Use A or y to select the restriction type setting you want AY RX CONDITION CoO CO WITH SENDER INFO 1 You can select from the following REGISTERED SENDR To allow reception from the numbers registered for speed dialing WITH SENDER INF
213. o may cause jams in the face up delivery slot and Caution result in damage to the machine 4 10 Paper Handling Chapter 4 an MIP HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 11 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A F T You can also use face up delivery when printing or receiving a large number of pages In this case remove the extension tray and place the Note machine on the edge of a table This will allow the pages to fall away from the machine and avoid blocking the face up delivery slot You may also want to place a box below the machine so that the pages can collect into the box N e 3 c G I o Q a Chapter 4 Paper Handling 4 11 a AZ lls HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af KA Zs A 1 1100 book Page 12 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Loading Paper The Paper Cassette You can stack up to approximately 250 sheets of plain paper 201b or 75 g m in the paper cassette The paper cassette holds letter and A4 size paper provided that its weight is within the range 17 24lb 64 90 g m To load the paper follow the steps in Loading Recording Paper on page 2 39 The Multi Purpose Tray N You can stack up to approximately 100 sheets of plain paper 201b or 75 g m in the multi purpose tray The multi purpose tray holds letter legal A4 custom1 and cu
214. ocal authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer immediately Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 5 an MIP HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B IN Important Save your sales receipt for proof of purchase in case your machine requires warranty service In addition to the items shipped with your machine if you wish to use the machine as a printer you will need a USB cable 16 4 feet 5 meters in length or shorter Note J Lifting the Machine Whenever you plan to move the machine be sure to 0 Hold the machine firmly and keep it level I Always grip the sides of the machine The recessed areas on each side of the machine serve as handles 2 6 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f o Removing Shipping Materials In order to protect your machine during shipping it has been packed with protective material that you must remove before using the machine Follow these steps The actual shipping materials may differ in shape quantity and position from the ones shown below IN Note o c 1 Remove all pieces of shipping tape from the outside of the machine G Setting Up Your 2 Open the operation panel by grasping it with both hands and gently pulling it toward you R
215. ocument e 30 letter or A4 size sheets i ot feedes capacity e 20 legal size sheets e 1sheet for sizes other than legal letter or A4 size sheets Manual document e 1 sheet feeder capacity Document sizes Maximum Automatic document feed WxL 8 5 x 14 in 216 x 355 9 mm Manual document feed 8 5 x Approx 39 in 216 mm x Approx 1 m Minimum Automatic document feed 5 8 x 4 1 in 148 x 105 mm Manual document feed 5 8 x 4 1 in 148 x 105 mm Document thickness e Automatic document feed 0 0028 0 005 in 0 07 0 13 mm e Manual document feed 0 0023 0 0118 in 0 06 0 3 mm Document weight e Automatic document feed 13 24 lb 50 90 g m e Manual document feed 10 6 90 Ib 40 340 g m Transmission time Approx 3 seconds G3 ECM MMR Based on 20 lb 75 g m paper Based on ITU T No 1 Chart A4 standard mode A 4 Specifications Appendix a AY Is HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Resolution Scanning image processing Recording method Recording paper size Recording paper weight 17 24 Ib 64 90 g m Fax printing speed Dialing L a Standard mode 203 dpi x 98 dpi 8 pels mm x 3 85 lines mm Fine mode 203 dpi x 196 dpi 8 pels mm x 7 7 lines mm Photo mode 203 dpi x 196 dpi 8 pels mm x 7 7 lines mm Super fine mode 203 dpi x 391 dpi 8 pels mm x
216. ollowing procedures o fa 2 D Ej o Frequently Asked N You do not need to disconnect the power cord while clearing paper jams Note Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF Use this procedure if the document in the machine s Automatic Document Feeder ADF jams or misfeeds If this occurs the message CHECK DOCUMENT appears in the display 1 Press Stop Stop Ai 1 Do not try to pull the document out without opening the operation LA panel or you may tear or smudge the document If you have a multi page document remove the entire document from the Automatic Document Feeder ADF and reload it Note g 2 Open the operation panel by gently pulling it toward you Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 5 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A an v ils f A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 3 Remove the jammed page by pulling it in either direction If the paper does not pull out easily do not force it Contact your local authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer N Note 4 When you are finished close the operation panel by pressing it down from the center as shown Ai Be sure to close the operation panel until it locks into place Otherwise the LA machine will not function properly Note 13 6 Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 13 HT1 2205 0
217. on 3 8 Registering Information in the Machine Chapter 3 o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nb A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o Entering the Date and Time Follow these steps to enter the date and time 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGSTRATION 3 Press Set twice Set Set DATA REGSTRATION gt 1 USER SETTINGS PEo USER SETTINGS EEF 1 DATE amp TIME 233 ocz as 4 Press Set again then use the numeric buttons to enter the correct month day year and time in this order 2 10 00 1 Enter only the last two digits of the year 1 Use the 24 hour format for the time so 2 30 p m is 14 30 for example and precede single digits with a zero 1 If you make a mistake press Clear then re enter the value 5 Press Set to save the date and time Set 6 Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD Chapter 3 Registering Information in the Machine 3 9 a a MIP HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B Registering Your Fax Number and Name Use the following procedure to register your fax telephone number and name 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel
218. on page 4 2 Make a copy with your machine If the copy looks all right then your machine is operating properly Contact the sender and have them check their machine 13 28 Frequently Asked Questions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Chapter 13 L a m SZ Zs Ei w ai Problem A 1 1100 book Page 29 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Possible cause Solution LA Note See also Printing Problems on page 13 33 The machine cannot receive faxes using ECM The sending machine may not support ECM ECM reception may not be turned on If the sending fax does not support ECM then the machine receives the fax in normal mode without error checking Make sure the machine ECM RX setting is enabled See pages 15 9 and 15 10 Nothing prints The toner cartridge may not have been installed properly The toner cartridge may need to be replaced Make sure the toner cartridge is installed correctly See page 2 33 See page 2 33 Received faxes are blotched or uneven The telephone lines may be in poor condition or you may have a bad connection The sending machine may not be functioning properly Use ECM receiving to try to eliminate such problems However if the telephone lines are in poor condition you may need to have the fax sent again The sending machine usually determines the fax s quality Call
219. one call The Machine Set for Automatic Switching Between Fax and Telephone Calls The machine monitors all incoming calls for all the numbers with DRPD The machine answers the telephone for you and checks to see if the call is from another fax machine or from a person wanting to talk to you If the call is from another fax the machine automatically receives the document If the call is from a telephone the machine rings to alert you to pick up the telephone No matter which number receives a call if you hear a slow beep signifying another fax trying to send you a document press Start Copy to receive the document 7 22 Receiving Faxes Chapter 7 m SZ Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af NZ GINS ps 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM F r Chapter 8 Using the Memory Features This chapter shows you how to use the memory features of the machine LY Documents Stored in Memory cccccecceesesesteteseeeeteteseeceneeseseanenenes 8 2 w e Printing a List of Documents Stored in Memory cccceee 8 2 g e Printing Documents Stored in MeMOLY cccseeeceeeeeteseseseens 8 3 8 Method hd ee incarnate nore peat ON anes Cerna Re 8 3 F 1 Cote ope enacted ee eee ai eae 8 4 Pe e Sending Documents Stored in MeMOLY ccccceesieeeceteseseseens 8 6 5 e Deleting a Document Stored in Memory s sss ssssesssrrtssssrstesstees 8 8 Method ose
220. orized Canon Facsimile Dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Preface vii HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Ei o SZ Zs AS A 1 1100 book Page viii Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM NB Use of shielded cable is required to comply with class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in this guide If such changes or modifications should be made you could be required to stop operation of the equipment Canon U S A Inc One Canon Plaza Lake Success NY 11042 U S A TEL No 1 800 OK CANON The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual In order to program this information into your machine you should complete registering your number and name See Chapter 3 Registering Information in the Machine for details viii Preface a AY Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af
221. orts and lists These include activity reports transmission and reception reports lists of registered numbers list of user s data registered in the machine and the memory clear report TH Activity Reportere ee a E E E E E AEA 12 2 O Transmission TX Reports s ss ssessssssesiesiessssrestertesesssestenteseesseseenee 12 4 Error TX Repotts rreson otenn n E EEE a 12 4 5 TX Repote ee es eb E e E Ea AAEE EEE 12 5 Multt TX RX Report nn aei nina ee 12 6 LE Reception RX Report cccccseccecccesesesesneneesesesneneesesceeesssesesnanenees 12 7 LE Memory Clear Report nagie aei aere eR ia Reia 12 8 d Speed Dialing Lists aiios riii e eai eke io 12 9 One Touch Speed Dial List 0 ccc cece raia 12 11 Coded Speed Dial List cece eie a ae a aeii 12 12 Gro p Dial list serri mina a aiak 12 13 EY Users Data Last sccceccestesecotatsterccocashentaesensecsendettececsnsnssessstestaneneateads ee 12 14 TH Doc Memory Lit erison einan i a a R a Ri 12 16 n 2 ga a 3 c G n 2 d 2 o a Chapter 12 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Reports and Lists 12 1 gt Ei a V US 9 a A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Activity Report The Activity Report is printed out automatically by the machine after every 20 sending and receiving transactions This report lists the details of the documents you have sent or received so that you can k
222. ou finish entering numbers press Start Copy to receive document Start Copy 9 4 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 9 an MIP HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A AZ ANS A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Canceling a Polling To cancel an incoming fax follow this procedure 1 Press Stop Stop CANCEL DURING TX RX YES NO 2 Press to stop receiving or to resume receiving the fax or Tone SYMBOLS 3 Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD Chapter 9 Setting Up and Using Polling 9 5 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af E ke te SE 25 2e e2 2 So oO no an v ils mal A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 Setting Up Polling Sending This section shows you how to set up your machine to store and hold a document until it is polled by another machine to send it Before You Can Be Polled to Send Before you set up your polling box contact the parties who are going to poll your machine to receive documents and confirm the following points 1 If you are using an ITU T password for the polling box they must also know this password This password setting is optional I Your TX PASSWORD must match the ITU T password attached when the other party calls you Confirm that the TX PASSWORD on
223. paper is free of dust lint and oil stains 1 Highly textured or extremely smooth or shiny paper does not print well 1 Damp curled wrinkled or torn paper can cause paper jams or poor print quality Ai For paper sizes other than letter legal and A4 be sure to use face up LA delivery See page 4 10 for details Note Envelopes Standard envelopes with diagonal seams and flaps are recommended Envelopes must meet the requirements listed for plain paper as well as the following 1 Envelopes must not contain clasps fasteners windows or peel off adhesive strips for sealing D Envelopes must be empty Do not put anything in the envelope prior to printing 1 Envelopes must be flat and straight Be sure to flatten out any curls or wrinkles before printing When feeding envelopes be sure to use face up delivery See page 4 10 for details N Note 4 4 Paper Handling Chapter 4 m SZ Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip AS Labels A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Sheets of letter or A4 size self sticking labels should also print without any problems Labels must meet the requirements listed for plain paper as well as the following m m Labels must have an ordinary matte finish similar to copy paper The label backing must not be made of easily removable coated paper Labels must not have any expos
224. paper to jam in the machine See page 13 5 for instructions on clearing paper jams Problem Paper does not feed through the multi purpose tray Possible cause The multi purpose tray may contain too many sheets Paper may not be inserted correctly in the multi purpose tray Solution Make sure the multi purpose tray is not filled past the limit See Chapter 4 Make sure paper is inserted all the way into the multi purpose tray See page 2 44 Printing is skewed Paper may not be stacked correctly in the multi purpose tray Make sure the stack of paper is straight in the multi purpose tray Make sure there are no gaps between the stack of paper and the paper guides See page 2 45 Make sure the paper exit path is clear Several sheets feed through the multi purpose tray at once Paper may not be loaded in the multi purpose tray correctly Sheets of paper may be sticking together Make sure paper is inserted correctly in the multi purpose tray See page 2 44 Fan the stack of paper and reload it Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae 13 21 a o fa 2 D Ej Co Frequently Asked a AY lls Ei KA Zs Problem Several sheets feed through the multi purpose tray at once continued A 1 1100 book Page 22 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Possible cause
225. pens remove the Note remainder of the document from the Automatic Document Feeder ADF You may need to open the operation panel to do so See page 6 24 for details Then divide the document into several sections and send each section separately Sending a Document Using Group Dialing If you frequently send faxes to the same group of people you can create a group Groups are stored under One Touch Speed Dialing buttons or Coded Speed Dialing codes See Chapter 5 Speed Dialing for details on registering numbers under groups and using Group Dialing N o xs re Da i lt j ne c O 72 Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 33 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 34 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Delayed Sending Your machine allows you to scan a document into its memory and send it automatically at a preset time By using this feature you can take advantage of lower long distance rates at night for example Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document See page 6 6 for more details IN Note 1 Prepare the document and load it face down into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 1 If necessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast See page 6 13 for more details 2 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel then press Delayed Transmission Delayed elaye Transmission D E L A Yy om
226. place your outlet do not use a 3 to 2 adapter Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug Do not connect the machine to an outlet shared with an appliance such as an air conditioner computer electric typewriter or copier These devices generate electrical noise which can interfere with the operation of the machine Make sure nothing is lying on the power cord and that the cord cannot be walked on or tripped over Do not overload the electrical outlet Make sure the total amperage used by all the machines connected to the outlet does not exceed the ampere rating of the outlet s circuit breaker Do not connect the machine to an uninterruptible power supply UPS Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 19 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s A o MET al tal 3 d gt o gt a a c Q 7 Ei a a AZ lls A 1 1100 book Page 20 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 Connect the power cord as follows 1 Connect the supplied power cord to the power connector on the back of the machine Pan KI 2 Connect the other end of the power cord to the outlet Ai The machine has no power switch so its power is on as long as the power cord is connected to the machine and to an outlet Once connected Note though the machine still needs to warm up before you can use it d While the machine is warming up the message PLEASE WAIT
227. r iv Preface HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L Ei a m SZ Zs AS NB A 1 1100 book Page v Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a USERS IN THE U S A PRE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CANON FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT A Location Supply a suitable table cabinet or desk See the Appendix for the machine s dimensions and weight B Order Information 1 Only a single line touch tone or rotary telephone set is to be used 2 Order an RJ11 C modular jack USOC code which should be installed by the telephone company If the RJ11 C jack is not present installation cannot occur 3 Order a normal business line from your telephone company s business representative The line should be a regular voice grade line or the equivalent Use one line per machine DDD DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL LINE Or IDDD INTERNATIONAL DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL LINE IF YOU COMMUNICATE OVERSEAS Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards e g the 2500 Touch Tone or 500 Rotary Pulse Dial telephones A dedicated Note extension off a PBX unit without Call Waiting can be used with the LASER CLASS 2050P Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send non standard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes which may cause a fax error N C Power Requirements This equipment should be connected to a standard 120 12
228. r 12 HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af e 1 1100 book Page 11 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM One Touch Speed Dial List 12 31 2002 10 32 FAX 8334423 WORLD ESTATE INC a 001 EEEE EEI ia sh aah ah ak ak seek saa 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL LIST 1 dkk EEEE EEI se NOT SORTED NO CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID TX TYPE 01 1914 438 3619 SEYMOUR GREEN REGULAR TX 02 722 2655 ROBERT STUART REGULAR TX 03 1516 911 4411 NATALIE SMITH REGULAR TX 06 761 1298 JOHN BARRISTER REGULAR TX 08 732 2233 ADAM BOOKS CPA REGULAR TX 12 31 2002 10 32 FAX 8334423 WORLD ESTATE INC 001 esse 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL LIST 1 aaah sak ak SORTED NO CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID TX TYPE 08 732 2233 ADAM BOOKS CPA REGULAR TX 06 761 1298 JOHN BARRISTER REGULAR TX 03 1516 911 4411 NATALIE SMITH REGULAR TX 02 722 2655 ROBERT STUART REGULAR TX 01 1914 438 3619 SEYMOUR GREEN REGULAR TX 12 31 2002 13 36 FAX 833 4423 WORLD ESTATE INC Id 001 dk EEEE EE kk 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL LIST2 seeks saa aR aa a a seek ae 01 CONNECTION TEL 1 914 438 3619 CONNECTION ID SEYMOUR GREEN NOT SORTED TX TYPE REGULAR TX 06 CONNECTION TEL 761 1298 CONNECTION ID JOHN BARRISTER TX TYPE REGULAR TX 08 CONNECTION TEL 732 2233 CONNECTION ID ADAM BOOKS CPA TX TYPE REGULAR TX 12
229. r Machine Chapter 2 o SZ HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 45 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A s i 3 Insert the stack of paper print side facing you and top edge first into the multi purpose tray d Insert the stack until it stops but do not force it in Machine d J o gt a a c Q 7 4 Adjust the paper guides to the width of the paper 1 Make sure there is no space between the paper guides and the stack of paper m NO SPACE PAPER PAPER GUIDES TOP VIEW Your machine is now ready to print Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 45 an v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A KA Zs A 1 1100 book Page 46 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Testing the Machine After you have assembled your machine installed the toner cartridge and loaded plain paper in the paper cassette or the multi purpose tray you can make sure the machine is printing properly by making several copies of a document For instructions see Chapter 11 Making Copies Note the following 1 Ifthe printed sheets are curled as they exit the machine remove them from the output slot immediately to avoid paper jams D Make sure your text or graphics fall within the printable area 2 46 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2
230. r a coin to push the screws into the plugs Make sure the screws are pushed in as far as they will go 2 14 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A f A 1 1100 book Page 15 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 4 Connect the handset cord to the input jack marked amp at the left side of the machine When carrying the machine do not lift it by the handset cradle as it may break Caution Chapter 2 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af Setting Up Your Machine 2 15 E a amp Setting Up Your mal an MIP A 1 1100 book Page 16 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Adjusting the Ringer and Speaker Volume Switches The ringer volume switch allows you to select the ring volume of the handset for incoming calls and the speaker volume allows you to select the speaker volume of the handset Use a pen or other pointed object to adjust these switches to high or low SPEAKER VOLUME SWITCH Maintaining Your Handset Follow these guidelines to maintain your handset in top working condition 1 Do not leave your handset exposed to direct sunlight 9 Do not install your handset in hot or humid conditions 0 Do not spray aerosol polishes on your handset as they may enter the holes on your handset and cause damage 1 Use a damp cloth to clean
231. r delayed sending 1 Polling button Use this button to set a document for polling sending and to poll the other machine to receive a document 1 Memory Reference button Use this button to delete or resend documents stored in memory or to print a list of documents in memory 1 Report button Use this button to print activity reports See Chapter 12 Reports and Lists for details Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 29 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 30 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E L button Use this button to enter a sign when registering fax telephone numbers 1 Space button Use this button to enter a space between letters and numbers 1 Clear button Use this button to clear an entire entry 1 A V Search buttons Use these buttons to scroll the display so you can see other options and selections in the menus during data registration d lt gt Cursor buttons Use these buttons to move the cursor left or right during data registration Use also these buttons to check the documents stored in memory 2 30 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 a HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nb A 1 1100 book Page 31 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A mi The Toner Cartridge Handling and Storing Cartridges I Do not expose the cartridge to direct sunlight or bright light for
232. r the number using the numeric buttons Coded Dial 1 For multiple entries press Coded Dial between each entry You cannot register numbers in the groups that have not been registered for one touch or coded speed dialing You can review the numbers registered under the group by pressing Aory e Ifyou want to delete one of these numbers from the group press Clear ERASING END is displayed e Ifyou want to add a number to the group press the One Touch Speed Dialing button or Coded Speed Dialing code the number is registered under and then press Set The number will be added to the group You can cancel registering numbers and return to standby mode by pressing Stop anytime before pressing Set in step 10 Chapter 5 Speed Dialing 5 25 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af 7 dD S m ke 2 7 a MWB als mal A 1 1100 book Page 26 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B 10 Press Set twice GROUP DIAL 2 NAME ie A 11 Enter the name using the numeric buttons for the group NAME OOO USA GROUP w mo w w LY See page 3 2 for details on entering letters 1 You can enter up to 16 characters for the name 12 Press Set Set gt 13 To enter additional groups repeat steps 7 to 12 Or If you have finished registering groups press Stop to retu
233. ress A or y to select 3 AUTO REDIAL Set A y lt gt e CG 5 Press Set then use A or y to select ON Set A y c gt CO CO 6 Press Set Set lt D REGIS A TRATIO 1 DATA REG N STRATION DATA REGSTRAT ON 3 TX SETTINGS TX SETTINGS 3 AUTO REDIAL AUTO REDIAL ON 7 Press Set again then use A V or the numeric buttons to enter the number of times you want the machine to redial 1 to 10 times 8 Press Set Set lt D REDIAL TIMES 2TIMES AUTO DIAL 2 R AL INTERVAL RE REDI Chapter 6 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af Sending Faxes 6 29 N o xs rs Da i lt j ne c O 72 mal a MIP A 1 1100 book Page 30 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o 9 Press Set again then use A V or the numeric buttons to select the time interval between redialings 2 to 99 minutes Sa REDIAL INTERVAL 2 MIN 10 Press Set TX SETTINGS 4 TIME OUT 11 Press Stop to return to standby mode ae 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTe STANDARD 6 30 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 a HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s A mal n ar 9 A 1 1100 book Page 31 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Sequential Broadcasting Sending a Document to More Than One Destination IN The machine s sequential broadcasting feature
234. riday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Memory Sending Memory sending is a quick and easy way to send a fax The machine scans the document into its memory as it dials the fax number If the line is free machine begins sending the fax as it scans the rest of the document The machine has enough memory to store up to 256 pages fewer if the document contains many graphics or particularly dense text Follow the instructions below to send a document with memory sending Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document See page 6 6 for details N Note 1 Prepare the document and load it face down into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 1 Once the document is loaded the LCD display shows the following MEMORY USED 0 DOCUMENT READY 1 If necessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast See page 6 13 for details 1 You may not be able to use memory sending if the percentage shown in the MEMORY USED display is close to 100 In this case use manual sending via the handset to send your document 2 Dial the other party s fax number TELs 9p8334777 1 Use one of the dialing methods described on page 6 17 1 If you must first dial a digit to get an outside line 9 for example add a pause after that digit by pressing Pause as shown in the example above 6 20 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 a Nb HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Us
235. ring your user information making copies or printing If you receive a fax while you are making copies or printing the machine stores the incoming fax in memory Then as soon as you finish making copies or printing the machine automatically prints the document If you are entering registration information the fax is printed as soon as it is received and does not go into memory 7 14 Receiving Faxes Chapter 7 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af E a NIP mal AZ ANS A 1 1100 book Page 15 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E mi Canceling an Incoming Fax To cancel an incoming fax follow this procedure 1 Press Stop CANCEL DURING TX RX YES NO 2 Press to stop receiving or to resume receiving the fax o x in dD 2 D D as SYMBOLS or Tone 3 Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop Chapter 7 Receiving Faxes 7 15 an v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A AS NB A 1 1100 book Page 16 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD Feature Some telephone companies offer a distinctive ring pattern DRP service whereby they assign two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to a single telephone line If your telephone company offers such a service you can have both a fax
236. rn to standby mode Stop 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD 5 26 Speed Dialing Chapter 5 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A f A 1 1100 book Page 27 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Using Group Dialing To send a document to a group of numbers follow these instructions Ai Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document See page 6 6 for more details Note 1 Prepare the document and load it face down into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 1 Ifnecessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast See page 6 13 for more details 2 Enter the group s stored under a One Touch Speed Dialing button s and or Coded Speed Dialing code s Ex TEL GROUP DIAL 03 USA GROUP Ex i Goasa Dial TEL GROUP DIAL OO 21 USA GROUP 1 If you make a mistake when selecting a group press Stop and start again 1 The name registered under that One Touch Speed Dialing button or Coded Speed Dialing code is displayed If no name is registered GROUP DIAL is displayed 1 If you press a One Touch Speed Dialing button or Coded Speed Dialing code that has no group or fax number registered under it the LCD displays NO TEL Make sure you press the correct 2 One Touch Speed Dialing button or enter the correct Coded S Speed Dialing code and that the group you want has been registered correctly under that button or code 2 z Chapter 5 Spee
237. rt insert the tabs into the corresponding slots above the face down delivery slot making sure that the smaller tab is on the left The other support tray holds documents as they are fed into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF To install this support insert the tabs into the corresponding slots above the Automatic Document Feeder ADF making sure that the smaller tab is on the left 2 12 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mal E t A 1 1100 book Page 13 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A s i o Attaching the Handset to Your Machine To attach the handset to your machine follow these steps 1 Remove the screws from the plugs and insert the plugs into the holes on the handset cradle Machine d J o gt a a c Q 7 SE g Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 13 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 14 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A B 2 Insert the plugs with the handset cradle in the holes on the machine Ai If you have difficulty inserting the plugs turn the machine so that the left LA side is facing you and the right side is placed against a wall This will Note allow you to insert the plugs without the machine moving 3 Use a cross point screwdriver o
238. s HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af o A 1 1100 book Page 39 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Loading Recording Paper When the message LOAD PAPER appears in the LCD display you need to add paper to the paper cassette or the multi purpose tray Here are a few tips you should follow when you load paper into the paper cassette or the multi purpose tray m m Be sure to load paper of the correct size weight and quantity recommended for your machine See Chapter 4 Paper Handling Stack the paper so that the top and bottom edges and sides are straight and even before placing it in the paper cassette or the multi purpose tray Do not print on both sides of the paper Doing so may cause several sheets to feed into the machine at the same time Let the paper run out before you refill the paper cassette or the multi purpose tray Avoid mixing new stock with paper already loaded in the paper cassette or multi purpose tray as the illustration shown below When adding new stock to the cassette or the multi purpose tray be sure to remove the remaining paper on the cassette or tray and reload it together with the new stock Failure to do so may cause paper jams Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 39 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mi Machine d J o gt a a c Q 7 an MWB als mal AS NB
239. s Report Report REPORT 1 ACTIVITY REPORT 3 Use A or V to select 4 DOC MEMORY LIST A V cy REPORT 4 D0C MEMORY LIST 4 Press Set Set oS prine REPORT 12 31 2002 09 58 FAX 8334423 WORLD ESTATE INC 001 DOC MEMORY LIST TX RX NO MODE CONNECTION TEL ID PGS SET TIME ST TIME 0051 DEL SQ BDCST 01 CANON 1 12 31 09 30 09 35 516 328 5000 09 35 12 16 Reports and Lists Chapter 12 ar HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM SA ZIN Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions If your machine is not operating properly use the information and suggestions in this chapter to try to solve the problem Ld If You Cannot Solve the Problem cccccessesescsessseseseseseneneeseees 13 2 ey Problems Indexesaciiccscictecc3inditeh tise a a E aE a 13 3 Papet Jaisi rhn a e ian a aa 13 5 e Problems Feeding Paper into the Machine ccccecceeees 13 21 e Faxing Problems ee ionsar eese ei ai rie aeiia 13 24 Telephone Problems arises sra per aiaee taiese di eatoni e 13 31 Copying Probles oeie e e riii E EE EERE 13 32 Printing Problems osoen R E E shade 13 33 Print Quality Problems sss eugenesia neris 13 35 General ProblemSisnssnayanrn nea 13 36 LY If the Power Goes Oufnezgunssgeniign u e a a E a E 13 37 1 Error Codes Messages and Sol
240. s ae o x Doa SE So oH o2 i 5 Ei m V US f A 1 1100 book Page 12 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM d Do not allow small objects such as pins paper clips or staples to fall into the machine If something does fall into it disconnect the power cord immediately and call your local authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer 1 Do not connect the power cord into an uninterruptible power supply UPS 1 Always disconnect the power cord before moving or cleaning the machine 1 Whenever you disconnect the power cord wait at least five seconds before you reconnect it 1 Keep the machine away from direct sunlight as this can damage it If you have to place it near a window install heavy curtains or blinds T Do not expose the machine to extreme temperature fluctuations Install the machine in a place with temperatures between 50 and 90 5 F 10 and 32 5 C 1 Always disconnect the power cord during thunderstorms I Before you transport the machine remove the toner cartridge 1 Always lift the machine as shown below Never lift it by its multi purpose tray or other supports 1 12 Introducing the Machine Chapter 1 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af E mal t w ai o A 1 1100 book Page 13 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Disconnect the power cord and contact your local authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer
241. s i 0 eats E REEE E 4 9 Bace U p Deliverys iirin a ai aE eaa Aen era EAE ESERE pao Tee adebeats 4 10 Leading Papets ssnir iA aar hina RAE a Ee EA tics 4 12 The Paper Cassette tirrenia esi as iee AE asies eR AEREI 4 12 The Multi Purpose Tia yssiron e Eo o Ai 4 12 xiv Contents a HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users Guide ah KA Zs A 1 1100 book Page xv Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Loading Envelopes in the Multi Purpose Tray cccccescsseeeseesetesees 4 13 Changing a Paper Size from Letter to A4 Size Paper in the Paper Cassette cccccsseceieescesesssesseneesesesnaenes 4 16 Changing the Paper Size Setting ceceeesesesteneneseseseeneeseses 4 19 The Paper Cassette gists oenige ieioea e RA Ea ARAE EE Sei 4 19 The Multi Purpose Trays ssiri en se i AAE 4 20 Chapter5 Speed Dialing svermeren iarere a KeK p n EAE SE EER 5 1 Speed Dialing Methods cccccccsssesesssneeseseeneneescecesescsssnsneesesesneneeseeeees 5 2 One Touch Speed Dialing issie i ieai o EER E Ee 5 3 Storing Numbers for One Touch Speed Dialing cccccceceeeeees 5 3 Changing a Number Name Stored Under a One Touch Speed Dialing Button cece cecesessessneesesesesneeaeees 5 7 Using One Touch Speed Dialing cccccccccesccceesesesteneeeseeeenenesees 5 10 Coded Speed Dialing c cecccccccccccsescsnsnsesesseseneesceceesesssssnsnensseseseeeseeees 5 12 Storing Numbers for Coded Speed Dialing cccceesese
242. s of the machine ED Special Dialing e Triei er rE ieai ERE E 10 2 e Dialing Through a Switchboard ssssesssssssstsrtsessesstesssestesssees 10 2 Long Distance Dialing eissit imeenea aikare ee kasiran 10 3 How ito Enter Pausesissierecetnepnenepi e a 10 3 e Using Tone Dialing On a Pulse Line 00 eee tenes 10 4 CI Restricting Reception ecccccceseesesccsesesesescscsssesesescsessseseseseseseeeees 10 6 Chapter 10 Special Features 10 1 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae a n o o ne S o Q Q 7 Ei a AZ lls Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Special Dialing This section explains special dialing features such as dialing through a switchboard and dialing international numbers Dialing Through a Switchboard A PBX Private Branch Exchange is an on site telephone switchboard If your machine is connected through a PBX or other telephone switching system you have to dial the outside line access number first and then dial the number of the party you are calling 10 2 Special Features Chapter 10 HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af a AY Zs A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Long Distance Dialing When you register a long distance number you may have to insert a pause either within or after the number For long
243. sables Error Correction Mode ECM during ON reception OFF 2 RX MODE Selects the receive mode See Chapter 7 FAX TEL AUTO SW If you select FAX TEL AUTO SW or DRPD you can select FAX ONLY MODE additional sub settings See pages 7 5 and 7 16 DRPD 3 INCOMING RING When the RX MODE setting is set to FAX ONLY MODE or OFF FAX TEL AUTO SW this setting enables disables ringing when ON the machine receives a call RING COUNT Selects the number of rings before the machine begins 2 TIMES 1 to 99 receiving 4 MAN AUTO When the receive mode is set to MANUAL MODE this setting OFF SWITCH determines if the machine switches to fax receive mode after it ON rings for a specified time F T RING TIME If you select ON above this setting selects the length of time 15 SEC 1 to 99 the machine rings before switching to fax receive mode 5 REMOTE RX Enables disables remote receiving ON OFF REMOTE RX ID If you select ON above this setting selects the remote 25 00 to 99 receiving ID 6 MEMORY RX Enables disables reception of a document in the machine s ON memory when a problem occurs during reception OFF 7 RX PAGE FOOTER Enables disables printing of the reception date and time page OFF number and transaction number TX RX NO at the bottom of ON each received fax page Default settings are shown in bold type Even if you have set INCOMING RING to ON the machine will only ring if you have connected the handset or an
244. se A V or the One Touch Speed Dialing button to select the One Touch Speed Dialing button you want to change between 01 and 24 A v Or o1 24 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL 04 20 545 8545 1 If the button you select is registered for Group Dialing GROUP DIAL appears Chapter 5 Speed Dialing 5 7 a MWB als HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 6 Press Set twice To delete a number 7 Press Clear to delete the number then press Set OS TELEPHONE NUMBER TEL 1 When you delete a number the name registered for that number is also deleted 8 Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop To change the number and or name 7 To change the number use the numeric buttons to enter the new number lt gt CoO CoO 1 The telephone fax number can be up to 120 digits long 1 Press Clear and re enter the number You can also use lt to delete the rightmost digit and enter the correct number 1 If you only want to change the name ignore this step and go to step 8 8 Press Set twice to display the registered name Set Set cd c gt 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL 2 NAME NAME tA Canon U S A NY 5 8 Speed Dialing Chapter 5 eo HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o
245. se a a a aia eas E a 8 8 Methods iis iste nienitiie wei nahn Sina ee inl ache 8 9 Chapter 8 Using the Memory Features 8 1 aa AY lls HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Documents Stored in Memory Documents stored in memory can be dealt with differently according to its type The following functions can be used with documents stored in memory for delayed sending or polling or with documents received in memory Printing a List of Documents Stored in Memory The machine can print out a list of documents stored in memory along with the transaction TX RX number of each Once you know the transaction number of a document in memory you can delete it This procedure is described later in this chapter To print a list of documents stored in memory follow this procedure 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel then press Memory Reference MEMORY REFERENCE 1 D0C MEMORY LIST 2 Press Set Set PRINTING REPORT d The machine begins printing a list of documents stored in memory 12 31 2002 09 58 FAX 8334423 WORLD ESTATE INC Id 001 TX RX NO MODE CONNECTION TEL ID PGS SET TIME ST TIME 0051 DEL SQ BDCST 01 CANON 1 12 31 09 30 09 45 516 328 5000 09 45 8 2 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 a HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users
246. select these options in the RX MODE submenu of the RX SETTINGS menu when Fax Tel Mode is selected fax tone is not detected Chapter 7 Receiving Faxes 7 7 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af NZ o x in dD 2 D D as t A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 Set the Fax Tel Mode options as follows 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel then press Data Registration 5 KENEINE 2 Press Set Set PATA BRCSERAT AQ 3 Use A or Vv to select 4 RX SETTINGS oS DATA REGSTRATION 4 RX SETTINGS 4 Press Set then use A or VY to select 2 RX MODE Set A oY oe PE RETO 5 Press Set then use A or y to select FAX TEL AUTO SW Set AY a a MORE TEL AUTO SW 6 Press Set Set FI RING START TIME 7 Press Set again then use A V or the numeric buttons to enter a time between 0 and 30 seconds Set A y co CO c o RING START TIME 8 SEC 1 This setting determines how many seconds the machine waits before ringing when it receives a call 7 8 Receiving Faxes Chapter 7 o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A 9 a A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 8 Press Set Set lt D 9 Press Set again then use A V or the numeric buttons to enter a time between 10
247. sesnenenes 2 17 e Connecting the Telephone Line ccccescsseesesteteteseeeeneseseeeens 2 17 e Connecting an Extension Telephone or Answering Machine 2 18 Connecting the Power Cord ccccccccsesesteneesesssteesesceeeneseseenens 2 19 Connecting the Machine to Your PC ccsececssseesteteteeeeeteseseeeens 2 22 d Getting Acquainted with Your Machine ccccccceeeceneeeeeenenes 2 23 es BOM t VIEW aicidach sree dei eetietelhe teens Thies Gere halbeeles see ieai ta Serie de Mee set 2 23 INST O VIC N E E E TT 2 24 Rear VIEW sesyisesnserisSesenteescoessaveensneneatarh en E eat RER RR AE 2 25 The Operation Panelis nsina srin i n rE EES 2 26 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 1 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae MET a d gt o gt a a c Q 7 Ei a VA US NZ Zs ZI F 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Special Function Buttons One Touch Speed Dialing Panel Open ccceeees 2 29 TE The Toner Cartridge cccecccccccccesesescenesesesnsneneseseeceseseseecenenesssesnanenes 2 31 e Handling and Storing Cartridges cccccscecesesteteteeeeeteseseseens 2 31 e Installing Replacing the Toner Cartridge eee eee 2 33 LY Loading Recording Paper ccccccccccceeeseseeneteseeeeseneseeceneesesesnanenes 2 39 Loading Paper in the Cassette cccccsccecceseseseeneteesesnenenes 2 41 Loading Paper in
248. so be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician Caution as appropriate x Preface e SZ Zs HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af AS A 1 1100 book Page xi Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM NB This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations A Note Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada The Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this terminal equipment is 1 0 The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides a
249. ss Set and use A or V to select paper size ob Gd MP TRAY LTR 1 You can select from the following LTR LGL CUSTOM A4 4 20 Paper Handling Chapter 4 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 21 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 7 Press Set Set lt 5 PRIN 3 E 8 Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD To set a Custom size 7 Besure to select CUSTOM in step 6 Press Set Set lt gt CUSTOM CUSTOM1 LONG 8 Use A or V to select paper size AY CUSTOM tae CUSTOM1 LONG CUSTOM CUSTOM2 SHORT 1 See page 4 3 for details on the paper size for CUSTOM1 LONG and CUSTOM2 SHORT 9 Press Set 2 os PRINTER SETTINGS 3 ECONOMY PRT r a 10 Press Stop to return to standby mode a a 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD Chapter 4 Paper Handling 4 21 a F v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A KA Zs A 1 1100 book Page 22 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a 4 22 Paper Handling Chapter 4 HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af ae AY Is Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 1 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Chapter 5 Speed Dialing This chapter describes how to register and use the speed dialing features of the machine m m Speed Dialing Methods cccccccceesc
250. sssssesisssesesssestssteseesssstentesnnssentennessesneseenee 2 1 Choosing a Location for Your Machine ssssessssssssssssssestesriesstsnteessesteessees 2 3 DIMENSIONS weve ctisescivstesevvenccieeseness aaae EE EEEE EEEE teed 2 4 Unpacking Your Machine isesi iiss nrretoripe leih deire iasi ieon etet 2 5 Do You Have Everything seesessssssesstsrtsrstestissneertinterttssnsestesntesstentnnss 2 5 Lifting the Machine sser iein iiiu isida oier riie 2 6 Removing Shipping Materials sesssssnsssststtsssterttssterttssssestesntesstentnnss 2 7 Replaceable Parts csser restini iiaeia a ip e Erias s Dea eE 2 9 Assembling the Machine ss sssssessssssssssestsssiertessserstesssesstsnteestenteesseentens 2 10 Attaching Components dersidir i e ai e aniei 2 10 Attaching the Paper Loading Warning Label cccceceeesees 2 10 Attaching the Extension Tray ccccccccccseseseenetesssesssneteseseeeenesesees 2 11 Straightening the Multi Purpose Tray cccccccseesesesseteseeeeteteeees 2 11 Attaching the Support TrayS cccccccsccesesescenetesesesnsteeseseeneesesees 2 12 Attaching the Handset to Your Machine cc ccc eee 2 13 Adjusting the Ringer and Speaker Volume Switches 2 16 Maintaining Your Handset cccccccccscesesescenetesssesssteeseseenesesseees 2 16 Making Connections c ccscscsccsescscscesesesssnsneseseseeneesescecesesesssnsnsessseseeneneseees 2 17 Connecting the Telephone Line cccc
251. sssssssestessserststeessesstesssestes 14 2 Cleaning the Inside of the Machine sn ssssssssssssesttssserstestsrssesstesseestes 14 3 Cleaning the Scanner COMPONENtS ccccseccscesesceeeesesesteneeeseeteeneeees 14 6 Transporting the Machine its ispi isete kieke tke iesieta AKEen 14 9 xviii Contents HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users Guide ah NZ Zs ZI LIT00 book Page xix Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM a Chapter 15 The Men System sinise hia aeii eaaa REA Er AE ENEE a 15 1 Understanding the Menu System se sssssesssssseritsssestssssesstsntesstesteesserstess 15 2 Accessing the USER SETTINGS Menu ccccccccescsceceescstsneneeseseeneeneeees 15 3 Accessing the REPORT SETTINGS Menu ccccccccceseseestetsteesesnetenesees 15 5 Accessing the TX SETTINGS Menu cccccccccsessssesescscesesestsneneeseseseeteneees 15 7 Accessing the RX SETTINGS Menu ccccccsssssescscscesescstsnsneeseseeneneneeees 15 9 Accessing the PRINTER SETTINGS Menu ou cccccccecseseetetetesestetenenees 15 11 Accessing the POLLING BOX Menu ccccessecescecseesesestenenesesesneneenees 15 13 Accessing the SYSTEM SETTINGS Menu ccccscccsseseststetetesesnenenenees 15 15 Appendix Specifications 00 0 0 ccc ccc eeesesesssenssesesesssssssesesesssssseesesesssssesesssssesssesesess A 1 Getieralie seriene e aE ans a EU EEE honed A 2 Plain Paper Paxsi rendes er eo enee aE Ea Ea AEE ERREA Re REE EEE te A 4 I E EE
252. stered under that coded speed dialing code is displayed If no name is registered the number registered under that code will be displayed 1 If you mistakenly enter the wrong code press Stop Then press Coded Dial and enter the correct code 1 If no fax number is assigned to the coded speed dialing code you press the LCD displays NO TEL If this happens make sure you enter the correct code and that the number you want to dial is registered under that code dD S m ke 2 7 Chapter 5 Speed Dialing 5 21 a MWB als HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 22 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E 4 Press Start Copy Start Copy 1 If you do not press Start Copy within five seconds of entering the coded speed dialing code the machine will begin sending automatically If you do not want the machine to send automatically you need to change the TIME OUT setting See pages 15 7 and 15 8 for more details d Ifan error occurs during sending the machine will print an error report If this happens try sending the fax again See Faxing Problems on page 13 24 for details about errors You can also use coded speed dialing to send a document to more than LA one location at a time For details see Group Dialing on page 5 23 and Note Sequential Broadcasting on page 6 31 5 22 Speed Dialing Chapter 5 a MIP
253. stom2 size paper provided that its weight is within the range 17 24lb 64 90 g m To load the paper follow the steps in Loading Recording Paper on page 2 39 When receiving documents the default setting is the paper cassette with same size paper remaining in both of the paper cassette and the multi Note purpose tray If paper runs out in the paper cassette the machine changes the setting to the multi purpose tray automatically The machine allows you to print different size paper See Accessing the PRINTER SETTINGS Menu on page 15 11 for details 4 12 Paper Handling Chapter 4 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae o a SZ TUS Ei A 1 1100 book Page 13 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Loading Envelopes in the Multi Purpose Tray Do not use the multi purpose tray to load envelopes when temperature or humidity levels are high The glue on the flap may become sticky and Caution stick to the envelope or cause a paper jam Ai Be sure to use face up delivery when printing on envelopes See page 4 10 for details Note 1 Prepare the envelopes 1 Arrange the stack of envelopes on a firm surface and press down firmly on the edges to make the folds crisp 1 You can stack up to seven envelopes together 1 Press around the envelopes to remove any curls and expel air from inside the envelopes 1 Press firmly on the area that corr
254. sx 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD Scanning a Document into Memory for Polling Sending Follow this procedure to store a document in the polling box 1 Prepare the document and load it face down into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 1 Ifnecessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast See page 6 13 for more details 2 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel xe te SE c 22 no 2 So oO no 3 Press Polling Polling Tr o ING TX 4 Press Set Set Your machine will scan the document automatically When another party polls your machine to receive a document stored in your polling box the document is sent if the following conditions are met 1 The password setting is optional However if you have registered a password for the polling box the other party s polling request must contain a matching password Chapter 9 Setting Up and Using Polling 9 9 an MWB als HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 1 Ifno password is registered for the document in the polling box and the other party s polling request contains a password then the document is not sent 9 10 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 9 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L a m SZ Zs Ei A 1 1100 book Page 11 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 P
255. t escape from the machine during any phase of user operation CDRH Regulations Caution The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2 1976 These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this user s guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure This label is attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and is not in a user access area DANGER Invisible laser radiation when open AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM ATTENTION RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GE FNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBLE IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCION RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO VARO _ AAVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NAKYMATTOMALLE LASERSATEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN VARNING OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR PPNAD ETRAKTA EJ STRALEN ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASER STRALING NAR DENNE ER ABEN UNDG BESTRALING ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRALING NAR DEKSEL APN
256. t touch the transfer charging roller black at the back as this may affect the print quality of your documents Caution 14 4 Maintaining Your Machine Chapter 14 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s A mal E e A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A mi 5 When you have finished cleaning the machine replace the toner cartridge 1 Gently press the cartridge into the machine as far as it will go Press down and back on the cartridge s handle d 5 o gt ov DE 8 6 e f 6 Close the front cover 1 Use both hands to press the cover back into its closed position 7 Reconnect the power cord Chapter 14 Maintaining Your Machine 14 5 an v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Cleaning the Scanner Components Periodically check the scanning glass and rollers Ai When you disconnect the power cord any documents stored in memory will be erased if you leave the machine disconnected for one hour or Note more Be sure to connect the power cord after cleaning to avoid this happening 1 Disconnect the power cord from the machine 2 Open the operation panel by gently pulling it toward you 14 6 Maintaining Your Machine Chapter 14 o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A MIP
257. teeteseteeees 5 12 Changing a Number Name Stored under a Coded Speed Dialing COM cise sti as cilercese ona sia ds TEE R AE 5 17 Using Coded Speed Dialing cccecceecsccscssesesceneesssesnsneeeseeneesesess 5 21 Group Dialing sssi eiis eina e iea Eaa eE a S ea Tia aie 5 23 Creating Groups for Group Dialing s sssssessssssesttssserstrtsestesstesseesees 5 23 Using Group Diali g srest e E E E E E a EES 5 27 Chapter6 Sending Fares wii scicsccssniiascnttansncuaenecnenehatautidnr naires 6 1 Preparing to Send a Faxo prsi eies ar seeroete iientnachaasesatecats 6 3 Document Requirements sesseesessssessertertissessertertessessestertessessentertestens 6 3 SCANMUIMS ATCA EET hensssassgsas sae ctsttens Hennoncaessueasesepa sedge desieeases 6 5 Selecting Automatic Manual Document Feed ccccececeseeeeeeeees 6 6 Loading Documents for Automatic Feed oo cesses eeeeeees 6 7 Loading Documents for Manual Feed cccccccssseseeteteseeeeteteeees 6 11 Setting the Resolution and Contrast cccccceeccesessesteteeeseeeeteneeees 6 13 Setting the Scanning Resolution c ccc ceneesestststeeseeeetenesees 6 13 Setting the Scan Contrast tiio tei iisi 6 14 Sending Methods ern n ate ceded a E EEA EEEa 6 15 Manual Sending Via the Handset cccccccseseesesteteeseeeeteesees 6 15 Memory Sending siansa ai ea EEN 6 15 Dialing Methods ccccccccecscscesesssesssnsesesesceseescecenesesssesnsneneseseeneneseeees 6 17 Sending Docu
258. ter b like this 1 Press until A appears in the upper right corner UNIT NAME Tone 2 Press 2 five times to display b ABC UNIT NAME To enter a symbol press repeatedly until the symbol you want appears Press any other button or gt to enter the symbol and move the cursor to the right Chapter 3 Registering Information in the Machine HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af 3 3 o S ao Efe ec amp Lor 2g SES gE o 2 mal E a v ils f o A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Entering two letters from the same group To enter two letters from the same group you have to use the right arrow button gt For example enter AA like this 1 Press until A appears in the upper right corner UNIT NAME A 2 Press 2 once to display the first A UNIT NAME A A 3 Press gt to enter the A and move the cursor to the right 5 UNIT NAME A 4 Press 2 once to display the second A UNIT NAME A AA Editing Information If you make a mistake while entering a name you can correct it by using lt and gt 1 Use lt or gt to scroll to the incorrect character 2 lt gt UNIT NAME A Cy Co CANEN Enter the correct character UNIT NAME A CANON Chapter 3 3 4 Registerin
259. the sender and have them make sure the top cover and scanning glass on their machine are clean Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae 13 29 a o fa 2 D Ej Co Frequently Asked a AZ lls Ei Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 30 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Problem Possible cause Solution Errors occur frequently The telephone lines may be Lower the speed at which while receiving in poor condition or you the machine receives faxes may have a bad connection in the RX START SPEED setting See pages 15 15 and 15 16 13 30 Frequently Asked Questions HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae Chapter 13 L a m V US Ei Nip AIMS A 1 1100 book Page 31 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Telephone Problems ao g lt E Problem Possible cause Solution gt 2 53 The machine cannot The telephone line may not Make sure the telephone 36 dial be connected properly line is securely connected to e the machine See page 2 17 The machine may not be set Make sure the machine is set for the type of telephone line for the type of telephone line you have pulse tone you have See page 3 12 If you are not sure what type of line you have contact your local telephone company Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 31 a
260. time you receive a document 3 ACTIVITY Enables disables automatic printing of an ACTIVITY REPORT AUTO PRINT ON REPORT after every 20 transactions See page 12 2 AUTO PRINT OFF Default settings are shown in bold type 15 6 The Menu System Chapter 15 o HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Accessing the TX SETTINGS Menu 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Data Registration REGISTRATION 1 DATA REGSTRATION 3 Press Set Set DATA REGSTRATION gt 1 USER SETTINGS 5 A 4 Use A or V to select 3 TX SETTINGS z 7 5 gt DATA REGSTRATION 7 3 TX SETTINGS 2 5 Press Set then use the A or V to display the item you want to set or change Chapter 15 The Menu System 15 7 a v ils HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Ge A 1 1100 book Page 8 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM TX SETTINGS For details on accessing the settings below see page 15 7 Setting Description 1 ECM TX Enables disables Error Correction Mode ECM during transmission Sub Settings ON OFF 2 MID PAUSE SET Selects the length of a pause entered within a fax telephone number with Pause 2 SEC 1 to 15 3 AUTO REDIAL Enables disables automatic redialing if the other party s line is busy on the first attempt See page
261. to Make sure you can reach it easily as you will be using the machine as a printer fax machine copier and telephone 1 Do not connect the power cord into the same circuit as an appliance such as an air conditioner electric typewriter television or copier Such devices generate electrical noise that can interfere with your machine s ability to send or receive documents 1 Set the machine on a flat stable vibration free surface that is strong enough to support its weight about 281b 13 kg Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 3 o a AY lls HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af AS A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM NB Dimensions Make sure the location you choose provides enough space around the machine for adequate ventilation and to allow paper to flow freely into and out of the machine The figure below shows the minimum space required for the machine m 30 a 773 mm TOP VIEW F 483 MM Ba al ae Ihe E TE iE BE 8 H aa LA SIDE VIEW _ oE le No E SLs Z aE g ra lt J j A
262. tter 8 5 x 11 in e Legal 8 5 x 14 in e A4 83x 11 7 in e Custom1 8 5 x 12 5 in to 8 5 x 13 4 in e Custom 8 5 x 10 0 in to 8 5 x 10 6 in Envelope sizes e US Commercial No 10 envelope 9 5 x 4 1 in e European DL envelope 220 x 110 mm Media type e Plain paper e Envelope U S Commercial No 10 or European DL e Transparencies e Labels Recording paper weight 17 24 Ib 64 90 g m Printing width Maximum 8 18 in 208 mm letter May occur to reduce stack of sheets or to enlarge the margins on a page A 8 Specifications Appendix a AY Is HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af f A 1 1100 book Page 9 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Printable Area Papers E The shaded area in the following figure shows the printable area for papers Printable area Letter size a 85 b Max 0 24 c Max 0 28 d 11 0 e Max 0 16 f Max 0 39 b el f Legal size a 85 b Max 0 24 c Max 0 28 d 14 0 e Max 0 16 f Max 0 41 A4 size 7 5 8 a 210mm 3 a b Max 4 0mm n c Max 5 0 mm d 297 mm e Max 4 0 mm f Max 10 0 mm Appendix HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af Specifications A 9 a v ils mal A 1 1100 book Page 10 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Printable Area Envelopes The shaded portion in the follow
263. tween dialing attempts See Setting Up Automatic Redialing on page 6 28 When automatic redialing is in use machine alternately displays AUTO REDIAL and the transaction number while it is waiting to redial 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 AUTO REDIAL 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 TX RX NO 0017 6 26 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 a MIP HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 27 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 9 When it begins redialing it alternately displays CALLING the transaction number TX RX NO and the fax number you dialed 2 31 2002 TUE 10 00 DIALING 2 31 2002 TUE 8 2 31 2002 TUE 10 00 ALLING oS m If you used One Touch or Coded Speed Dialing to dial the number the name registered under that button or code will also be displayed If the receiving machine does not answer on the last attempt machine displays BUSY NO SIGNAL 0 TUE 10 00 02 SIGNAL 12 31 2 BUSY NO If this happens try sending again later Canceling Automatic Redialing 1 Wait until machine begins redialing 2 31 2002 TUE 10 00 IALING 1 While machine is waiting to redial the LCD displays AUTO REDIAL 2 Press Stop 1 The machine asks you to confirm that you want to cancel Stop CANCEL DURING TX RX YES NO Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 27 a HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL
264. u print a document stored in memory using the following procedure the print is reduced to 90 of the original A Note 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel then press Delayed Transmission Trangmieyon DELAYED TX 1 REGISTER 2 Use A or V to select 3 PRINT AY DELAYED TX eo 3 PRINT 3 Press Set Set lt gt DELAYED TX TX RX NO 0001 4 Use A or V to select the TX RX number which you want to print oS DELAYED TX TX RX NO 0005 1 You can check the documents stored in memory by pressing lt or gt 8 4 Using the Memory Features Chapter 8 eo HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A 9 A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM 5 Press Set Set C 1ST PG ONL YES y NO 6 Press for the first page only or for all pages SYMBOLS Qo Tone 7 Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop DELAYED TX PRINTING P 001 002 0005 Chapter 8 a HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af Using the Memory Features 8 5 gt d 2 Eo Z2 oz 6 0 for S D mal an v ils A 1 1100 book Page 6 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Sending Documents Stored in Memory 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel then press Memory Reference 5 ADOC MEMORY LIST 2 Use A or V to select 3 RESEN
265. up to 16 characters for the name ooo O If you want to keep the same name do not enter a new name and go to step 12 12 Press Set dD S m ke 2 7 Set lt gt ou Chapter 5 Speed Dialing 5 19 a J HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A v ils A 1 1100 book Page 20 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A s i o 13 To change additional numbers and or names press Data Registration and repeat steps 7 to 12 Or If you have finished changing numbers and or names press Stop to return to standby mode Stop 12 31 2002 TUE 10 00 FaxTel STANDARD 5 20 Speed Dialing Chapter 5 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 21 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E Using Coded Speed Dialing Once you have registered your numbers under Coded Speed Dialing codes you can send documents as follows Ai Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document See page 6 6 for more details Note 1 Prepare the document and load it face down into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 1 Ifnecessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast See page 6 13 for more details 2 Press Coded Dial ae T E L 3 Use the numeric buttons to enter the two digit code assigned to the fax number TELS 2 50921 04 Canon CANADA 1 The name regi
266. utions sss ssessssssesissiessesseseesee 13 38 Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 1 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae o fa 2 D Ej Co Frequently Asked a v US Ei A 1 1100 book Page 2 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E If You Cannot Solve the Problem If you have a problem with your machine and cannot solve it using the information in this chapter contact your local authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer If the machine makes strange noises or emits smoke or strange smells disconnect the power cord immediately and contact your local Caution authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine yourself Ai Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited i warranty Note Before contacting your local authorized Canon Facsimile Dealer make sure you have the following information about your machine 1 The machine s model name LASER CLASS 2050P 1 The machine serial number on a label on the back of the machine HXXXXX Serial No UZX SERIAL NUMBER LY Where you purchased the machine 1 A detailed description of the problem 1 The steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results 13 2 Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 13 a MIP HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 20
267. ving a fax 7 2 Receiving Faxes Chapter 7 a AY Is HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Li FAX ONLY MODE Use this mode if the machine is connected to a separate telephone line used only for transmitting faxes The machine then answers all calls and receives all documents automatically Li ANS MACHINE MODE Use this mode if you plan to connect an answering machine to the machine to receive documens and telephone messages The machine then receives incoming faxes normally and routes incoming telephone calls to the answering machine Once you have decided which mode you want set the mode as described in see Setting the Receive Mode on page 7 5 You can change the mode at any time Chapter 7 Receiving Faxes 7 3 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae o 0 x lt in dD 2 D D as Ei a m V US o A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Setting the RX MODE Set the machine RX MODE as follows 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel then press Data Registration Data 5 o aes 2 Press Set Set 5 E 3 Use A or V to select 4 RX SETTINGS A vy b RART 4 Press Set then use A or y to select 2 RX MODE Set A v See Ie 5 Press Set then use A or y to select an item Set A
268. work G3 MH MR MMR FAX modem 33600 31200 28800 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps automatic fallback Approximately 3 seconds page transmitting from memory e Approx 6 4 MB DRAM MR storage e Approximately 256 pages e LCD displays memory used e Uses direct transmission when memory is full 20x2 ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH PORTUGUESE 120 127 V AC 60 Hz e Maximum approximately 660 W e Minimum approximately 5 W Standby mode 14 9 x 19 0 x 11 95 in 380 x 483 x 303 5 mm main unit only no trays no handset Approximately 28 7 lb 13kg e Temperature 50 90 5 F 10 32 5 C e Humidity 20 80 RH Based on ITU T No 1 Chart ECM MMR standard mode Based on ITU T No 1 Chart standard mode A 2 Specifications Appendix HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae L Ei a m SZ Zs Ally NB A 1 1100 book Page 3 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Applicable standards Electrical safety UL1950 C UL e Radiation FCC Part 15 Class B IC e PTT FCC Part 68 IC e Energy Star compliant e Others CDRH TSCA FCC Part 255 Interface USB N amp E 5 2 z Appendix Specifications A 3 a AZ lls HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af AS NB A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A a Plain Paper Fax Automatic d
269. x approx 39 in 216 mm x approx 1 m W xL e Minimum 5 8 x 4 1 in 148 x 105 mm Quantity e lpage Thickness 0 0023 0 0118 in 0 06 0 3 mm Weight e 10 6 90lb 40 340 g m n o x ra a c ne c Q 2 Chapter 6 Sending Faxes 6 3 V US HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af 9 a A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Ai Problem documents 1 To prevent paper jams in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF do Not not use any of the following paper in machine WRINKLED OR CURLED OR TORN PAPER CREASED PAPER ROLLED PAPER CARBON PAPER OR COATED PAPER ONION SKIN OR CARBON BACKED THIN PAPER PAPER 1 Remove all staples paper clips or any other fasteners before loading the document into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 1 Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading the document into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 1 If you have a document that will not feed into machine properly make a photocopy of the document then load the copy instead 6 4 Sending Faxes Chapter 6 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mal n ar AZ ANS A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A F P o Scanning Area The margins of 0 12 in 3 0 mm on both sides of the sheet and 0 16 in 4 0 mm on the top and bottom are outside machine s
270. y k MOP AX I TEL AUTO SW a MODE AX ONLY MODE RX MODE DRPD d If you select FAX TEL AUTO SW go to step 6 on page 7 8 to complete the setting 1 If you select DRPD go to step 6 on page 7 17 to complete the setting 1 If you select FAX ONLY MODE press Set and then press Stop to return to standby mode 7 4 Receiving Faxes HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af Chapter 7 E e mal A 1 1100 book Page 5 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A mi Setting the Receive Mode Set the machine receive mode as follows 1 Press Receive Mode Receive Mode ca o x in dD 2 D D as 1 The LCD display shows the current receive mode setting 2 Ifyou want to change the receive mode press Receive Mode until the mode you want appears Receive Mode lt gt 3 Press Stop to return to standby mode Stop Receiving Documents and Telephone Calls Automatically Fax Tel Mode Set this mode if you want your machine to automatically switch between voice and fax calls You can control precisely how your machine handles incoming calls by adjusting the settings described below Setting Up Fax Tel Mode When you select Fax Tel Mode from the Data Registration menu you can also set the following options Li RING START TIME When a call comes in the machine checks to see if it is a person wishing to speak to you
271. y move the front paper guide to the rear of the machine then the tabs of the paper guide will come out of the slots of the paper cassette 3 Loosen the inside paper guide screw counter clockwise about two turns on each side of the paper cassette LA Do not take out the screws completely Note 4 16 Paper Handling Chapter 4 o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A f o LA A 1 1100 book Page 17 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM E 4 Move the inside paper guide toward inside of the paper cassette Insert the tab into the inside slot The figure below shows inside slots bottom view Note INSIDE SLOT F A aa f Si O E 5 Lo 5 a a a f INSIDE SLOT a Chapter 4 Paper Handling 4 17 HT 1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users af a MIP A 1 1100 book Page 18 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A E 5 Tighten the screw clockwise on each side of paper guide Ai Follow the reverse procedure above to change a paper size from A4 to LA letter size paper Note 4 18 Paper Handling Chapter 4 t HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 19 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM A
272. y 7 13 8 2 thickness 6 3 trouble with multipage 6 9 weight 6 3 Document feed automatic 6 3 6 6 6 7 lever 2 26 6 6 manual 6 3 6 6 6 11 Document feed lever explanation 2 26 using 6 6 Documentation User s Guide 2 5 E ECM Error Correction Mode 1 3 ECM RX message 13 42 setting 15 10 ECM TX message 13 42 setting 15 8 ECONOMY PRT 15 12 Editing information 3 4 Entering date 3 9 guidelines 3 2 letters 3 2 numbers 3 2 pauses 10 3 symbols 3 2 time 3 9 your fax number 3 10 yourname 3 10 Envelopes selecting 4 3 Error TX report 12 4 Extension telephone connecting 2 18 features 1 5 jack 2 25 problems 13 31 Extension tray 2 5 2 23 attaching 2 11 Index HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s ae V US Nip ANS A 1 1100 book Page 4 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM F F T RING TIME setting 7 6 7 7 Face down delivery 4 8 setting 4 9 slot 2 23 Face up delivery 4 8 setting 4 10 slot 2 23 Fax number registering your 3 10 FAX ONLY MODE description 7 3 using 7 11 Fax Tel Mode 7 2 7 5 description 7 2 FaxOnly See FAX ONLY MODE Features copier 1 5 extension telephone 1 5 main 1 3 plain paper fax 1 3 printer 1 4 Feeding paper Fixing assembly 2 24 Front cover 2 23 2 24 problems 13 21 G Group dial list sample 12 13 Group dialing 5 2 5 23 creating groups 5 23 description 5 2 sending with 6 33 using 5 27 Guides document 2 23 p
273. y documents document in memory stored in memory See page leaving very little or no 8 2 memory available Chapter 13 Frequently Asked Questions 13 27 a HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s A aa Ei V US KA Zs Problem The machine will not switch between telephone and fax calls automatically continued A 1 1100 book Page 28 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Possible cause An error may have occurred during reception The paper cassette the multi purpose tray may be empty The sending machine may not send the CNG signal that tells the incoming signal is a fax Solution Check the LCD display for an error message See page 13 38 for a listing of the machine s error messages Print an activity report and look for an error code See page 12 2 Make sure the paper cassette the multi purpose tray has paper in it In such cases you will have to receive the document manually See page 7 10 The machine will not receive faxes manually You may not have pressed Start Copy before hanging up the handset Always press Start Copy before hanging up the handset If you hang up before pressing Start Copy you will disconnect the call The print quality is poor You may not be using the correct paper The sending machine may not be operating properly Make sure the paper in the paper cassette the multi purpose tray meets the requirements given
274. your machine matches the ITU T password attached when the other party calls you 1 Ifthe other party s machine does not support ITU T subaddress password transactions do not set the password Setting Up a Polling Box Before you can use polling sending you must create a polling box with the POLLING BOX of the Menu System The polling box holds the document in the memory until the other party prompts polls your machine to send the document 1 Open the One Touch Speed Dialing panel 2 Press Data Registration Data Registration REG 1 N STRATION 9 6 Setting Up and Using Polling Chapter 9 HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL User s af mal E an MIP A 1 1100 book Page 7 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM o 3 Press Set then use A or y to select 6 POLLING BOX Set A y g gt DATA REGSTRATION e 1 USER SETTINGS DATA REGSTRATION 6 POLLING BOX 4 Press Set three times Set Set Set POLLING BOX 1 SETUP FILE SETUP FILE 1 FILE NAME FILE NAME A 5 Enter the file name using the numeric buttons FILE NAME CANON TOKYO xe te SE Z 22 no 2 So oO no 6 Press Set Set SETUP FILE 2 PASSWORD 7 Ifyou do not want to set a password press the A or V to display the next item and go to step 10 Or If you want to enter a password to protect the polling box setup file
275. your wall telephone jack Chapter 2 Setting Up Your Machine 2 17 a MWB als HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A A 1 1100 book Page 18 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM f Connecting an Extension Telephone or Answering Machine If you have an external device to your machine connect the end of the extension telephone or answering machine cord to the jack marked 6 A Wea BaF 2 18 Setting Up Your Machine Chapter 2 o HT1 2205 000 V 1 0 LSL Users A Nb Nip AS A 1 1100 book Page 19 Friday December 13 2002 5 07 PM Connecting the Power Cord Follow these guidelines when connecting your machine to a power source Caution m m The machine is intended for use in the U S and Canada only and requires 120 127 V AC Do not use it outside the U S or Canada Connect the machine only to a 120 127 V AC 60 Hz three prong grounded outlet Use only the power cord that came with the machine Using a longer cord or extension cord can cause the machine to malfunction Disconnect the power cord only by pulling on the plug itself Never pull on the cord The machine is equipped with a three prong grounding type plug the third pin is a grounding pin This plug will only fit into a grounding type outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into your outlet contact an electrician to re

User` User User`` - Electronic Business Machines

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents